Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Manx Financial Group

Manx Financial Group

mfx · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker mfx
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2022 Annual Report · Manx Financial Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
_________________________________ 

ANNUAL REPORT 2022 

PLC 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Welcome to Manx Financial Group PLC 
Integrity through independence and service  

An  independent  banking  and  financial  services  group  founded  in  1935, 
domiciled in the Isle of Man 

Conister Finance & Leasing Ltd (“CFL”) 
is a subsidiary of the Bank. It is a credit 
broker  providing  hire  purchase  (“HP”) 
and leasing finance facilities in the UK.  

CFL is regulated by the FCA in the UK 
and 
registered  as  a  designated 
business by the FSA in the Isle of Man. 

Conister  Bank  Limited  (“Bank”)  is  a 
licensed independent bank, regulated by 
the 
Isle  of  Man  Financial  Services 
Authority  (“FSA”),  the  UK’s  Financial 
Conduct  Authority  (“FCA”)  and  is  a  full 
member of the Isle of Man’s Association 
of Licensed Banks.  

The Bank provides a variety of financial 
products and services, including savings 
accounts,  asset 
financing,  personal 
loans, loans to small and medium sized 
enterprises, block discounting and other 
specialist secured credit facilities to the 
Isle  of  Man  and  the  UK  consumer  and 
business sectors. 

Manx Financial Group PLC (“Company” or 
“MFG”)  is  an  AIM-listed  company  (LSE: 
MFX.L)  which  has  subsidiaries  (together 
referred  to  as  “Group”)  offering  a  suite  of 
financial services to retail and commercial 
customers, both in the Isle of Man and the 
UK. MFG's strategy is to combine organic 
growth with strategic acquisition to further 
augment the range of services it offers and 
to  gain  greater  market  share 
its 
preferred markets.  

in 

The Group’s subsidiaries are:  
 Conister Bank Limited 
 Conister Finance & Leasing Ltd 
 MFX Limited 
 Payment Assist Limited 
 Blue Star Business Solutions Limited 
 Edgewater Associates Limited 
 Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited 
 The Business Lending Exchange Limited 

MFX Limited (“MFX”) provides access to 
foreign  exchange  and 
competitive 
international 
processing 
facilities. 

payment 

Payment  Assist  Limited  (“PAL”)  is  the 
UK's  leading  automotive  repair  point-of-
finance  provider  and  offers 
sale 
insured 
lending 
diversified 
products and retail.  

including 

Blue  Star  Business  Solutions  Limited 
(“BBSL”)  is  a  finance  broker  providing 
asset  finance  and  commercial  loans  in 
the  UK  to  the  small  and  medium  sized 
enterprises market. 

MFX’s  target  customers  are  corporates 
and  private  clients  who  have  a  foreign 
international  payment 
exchange  and 
foreign 
requirement 
exchange providers. 

their  UK 

via 

PAL was acquired as part of the Group’s 
strategy 
to 
underserved UK credit markets. 

its  access 

increase 

to 

BBSL  was  acquired  as  part  of  the 
Group’s  strategy 
its 
distribution  in  the  UK  broker  credit 
market. 

increase 

to 

Edgewater Associates Limited (“EAL”) is 
the largest firm of Independent Financial 
Advisors (“IFA”) in the Isle of Man and is 
regulated by the FSA.  

Ninkasi  Rentals  &  Finance  Limited 
(“NRFL”)  was  acquired  as  part  of  the 
Group’s strategy to increase its access to 
underserved UK credit markets. 

The  Business  Lending  Exchange 
(“BLX”)  was  acquired  as  part  of  the 
Group’s  strategy  to  increase  its  access 
to underserved UK credit markets. 

EAL  provides  a  bespoke  and  personal 
service to Isle of Man residents and to the 
Group’s 
personal 
customers  and  advises  on  assets  in 
excess  of  £319  million  (2021:  £368 
million). 

business 

and 

NRFL  provides  equipment  finance  and 
rental  products  to  UK  based  craft  and 
micro-breweries. 

BLX is regulated by the FCA in the UK 
and  primarily 
start-up 
companies  and  small  businesses 
which require asset backed finance. 

lends 

to 

 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
Chairman’s Statement 

Business Model and Strategy 

Environmental, Social and Governance Report 

Risk Management 

Corporate Governance Report 

Directors, Officers and Advisers 

Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee 

Directors’ Remuneration Report 

Directors’ Report 

Annual Financial Statements’ Contents 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 

Independent Auditor’s Report 

Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income 

Company Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income 

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 

Company Statement of Financial Position 

Consolidated and Company Statements of Changes in Equity 

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 

Company Statement of Cash Flows 

Notes to the Consolidated and Company Financial Statements 

4 

7 

9 

10 

15 

19 

22 

25 

27 

28 

29 

30 

36 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Dear Shareholders 

Introduction 
In  my  report  last  year,  I  discussed  the  negative  economic 
environment  and  how  it  would  result  in  higher  interest  rates 
and higher inflation despite a tight employment market. With 
the Isle of Man and UK economy now proving more resilient, 
with  inflation  falling  faster  than  expected,  and  the  labour 
market  remaining  robust,  it  appears  likely  that  the  Bank  of 
England will avoid declaring a further interest rate rise. Indeed, 
it  now  looks  as  if  the  UK  will  avoid  a  recession  altogether. 
Notwithstanding,  I  also  predicted  that  excellent  acquisition 
opportunities would arise in this environment, and I still believe 
this to be the case, and that our strengthened balance sheet 
positions us well to take advantage of them.  

Our  principal  operating  subsidiaries’  strategy  of  growth 
through gaining market share in recession-proof markets, both 
organically and through acquisition, has allowed us this year 
to take advantage of opportunities in a prudent and compliant 
manner. In our Interims, I was pleased to report our strongest 
profit before tax payable in more than a decade and now I am 
equally  pleased  to  report  a  record  full-year  profit  before  tax 
payable  of  £5.2  million  (2021:  £3.0  million)  –  an  increase  of 
71.2%.  

These  record  results  have  improved  our  balance  sheet  by 
£70.5 million  to  £379.3 million  (2021: 308.8  million)  and  our 
shareholder  equity  by  £4.8  million  to  £29.8  million  (2021: 
£25.0 million). This further underpins the Board’s commitment 
to return 10.0% of the Group’s profit available to shareholders 
each year in the form of cash and shares. This year, the total 
dividend available for payment is £0.433 million (2021: £0.279 
million).  Thus,  the  amount  recommended  for  shareholder 
approval will be 0.3764 pence per share (2021: 0.2443 pence 
per share), a 54.1% uplift, as we continue to reward our loyal 
shareholders.  

Financial Performance 
This year’s financial performance is a record year despite the 
continued economic uncertainty in the Isle of Man and the UK. 
Profit  before  tax  payable  increased  by  £2.2  million  to  £5.2 
million  (2021:  £3.0  million),  a  growth  of  over  70%.  For  the 
second year running, Conister Bank Limited set a new lending 
milestone of £231.4 million (2021: £212.6 million), an increase 
of 8.8%. Whilst the cost of deposits increased in the second 
half of the year as the Bank of England increased interest rates 
to dampen inflationary pressures, the Group improved its Net 
Interest  Margin  by  £6.4  million  to £24.4  million  (2021:  £18.0 
million). With other subsidiaries making a positive contribution, 
notably Conister Finance & Leasing Limited, MFX Limited and 
Payment Assist Limited, this  resulted in Operating Income of 
£26.1  million  (2021:  £20.0  million),  despite 
last  year 
benefitting from a £0.7 million revaluation credit. 

to 

Operating Expenses, excluding provisions, increased by £4.3 
million to £16.9 million (2021: £12.6 million), with £2.6 million 
relating 
incremental  personnel  expenses,  driven  by 
acquisitions  and  further  investment  in  our  UK  headcount,  in 
readiness  of  receiving  our  recently  applied  for  UK  Branch 
deposit  taking  licence.  The  balance,  £1.7  million,  relates  to 
further 
the 
increased 
pandemic; general overheads; and the impairment of a portion 
of the goodwill carried in respect of our Isle of Man based IFA. 
Impairments  reduced  by  £0.4  million  to  £4.0  million  (2021: 
including  operating 
total  overheads, 
£4.4  million)  and 

travel  costs  post 

investment; 

IT 

expenses and impairments, increased by £3.9 million to £20.9 
million  (2021:  £17.0  million).  Our  Profit  Before  Tax  ratio, 
measured as profit before tax as a percentage of total income, 
improved  by  3.7%  to  17.0%  (2021:  13.3%).  Another  key 
operational efficiency measure, our Loan to Deposit ratio, also 
improved, this time by 5.4% to 95.8% (2021: 90.4%). 

Turning to our balance sheet, our Total Assets increased by 
£70.5 million to £379.3 million (2021: £308.8 million), a growth 
of 22.8%. This was driven mostly by a £62.2 million increase 
in  our  loan  book.  As  part  of  our  prudent  approach  to 
maintaining  our  balance  sheet,  we  continue  to  value  any 
government backed assets monthly on a mark-to-market basis 
so  that  their  carrying value  always  reflects  their  true  current 
market value. Our Isle of Man depositors continued to support 
the  business,  with  deposits  increasing  by  £50.7  million  to 
£304.2 million (2021: £253.5 million). Total Liabilities stood at 
£349.5 million (2021: £283.8 million), leading to an increase in 
total  equity  of  £4.8  million  to  £29.8  million  (2021:  £25.0 
million). A measure of the Company’s financial wellbeing, our 
Debt to Asset ratio, which we measure on a conservative basis 
as  being  total  debt  as  a  percentage  of  total  tangible  assets 
(discounting  goodwill  and  intangibles)  remains  robust  at 
91.7% (2021: 92.4%), meaning our liabilities are covered by 
assets 1.1 times (2021: 1.1 times). 

Key Objectives 
Whilst  the drivers of  economic uncertainty have shifted  over 
the  last  four  years,  our  key  objective  of  safely  growing 
shareholder  value  has  remained  unchanged.  Thus,  our 
strategic  focus  has  continued  to  be  as  previously  reported, 
namely to: 

  Provide the highest quality of service throughout our 
operations  to  all  customers,  ensuring  that  their 
treatment is both fair and appropriate; 

  Adopt a pro-active strategy to managing risk within a 

structured and compliant manner; 

  Concentrate  on  developing  our  core  business  by 
considered  acquisitions, 
increasing  prudential 
lending,  and  augmenting  the  range  of  financial 
services we offer; 
  Prudently  progress 

implementation  of  an 
enhanced  and  scalable  IT  infrastructure  to  better 
service  the  operational  requirements  of  a  growing 
Group without the requirement for a disproportionate 
increase 
in  headcount  and  other  associated 
operational costs; 

the 

  Continue  to  develop  our  Treasury  management  to 
improve the return on the liability side of our balance 
sheet; and 

  Manage our balance sheet to exceed the regulatory 

requirements for capital adequacy. 

Our Strategic Report is set out in greater detail on page 7 of 
these accounts. Our approach to Risk Management is set out 
on page 10 of these accounts. 

Environmental, Social and Corporate Governance 
Climate  change  presents  financial  and  reputational  risks  for 
the  financial  services  industry.  The  Board  consider  climate 
change a material risk as per the Board-approved risk appetite 
framework,  which  provides  a  structured  approach  to  risk-
taking within agreed boundaries. The assessment framework 
is proportional at present, but it will develop over time as the 

Page | 4  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Group  generates  further  resources,  and  industry  consensus 
emerges. Whilst it is difficult to assess how climate change will 
unfold,  the  Group  is  continually  assessing  various  risk 
exposures. Both Isle of Man and the UK have committed to cut 
their greenhouse gas emissions to “net-zero” by 2050. There 
is growing consensus that an orderly transition to a low-carbon 
economy  will  bring  substantial  adjustments  to  the  global 
economy, which will have financial implications while bringing 
risks  and  opportunities.  The  risk  assessment  process  has 
been integrated into our existing risk frameworks and will be 
governed  through  the  various  risk  governance  structures, 
including  review  and  recommendations  by  the  Group’s  Risk 
Committee.  

The  Group  is  continuously  developing  a  suitable  strategic 
approach  to  climate  change  and  the  unique  challenges  it 
poses. In  addition to  the  modelling  of various scenarios and 
various  governance  reviews,  the  Group  will  continue  to 
monitor requirements through its relationship with UK Finance 
and the equivalent Isle of Man forums. 

Our  Corporate  Governance  Report  and  a  review  of  our 
compliance  with  the  principles  of  the  Quoted  Companies 
Alliance Code is set out in greater detail on page 15 of these 
accounts.  A more detailed review of our ESG compliance is 
set out on page 9 of these accounts. 

Conister  Bank  Limited  and  Conister  Finance  and  Leasing 
Limited 
Both the Bank and CF&L continued to progress with prudent 
lending  strategies,  with  the  loan  book  increasing  by  £57.7 
million to £292.1 million (2021: £234.4 million). We recorded 
growth in both of our markets, namely, our home market, the 
Isle of Man, and the UK.  

The Isle of Man market’s demand for loan finance has virtually 
returned  to  its  pre-pandemic  levels,  and  the  Bank  has 
improved its market share through flexible online offerings. On 
Island,  the  Bank  lent  a  record  £50.5  million  (2021:  £42.9 
million) 
to  consumers  and  Small  and  Medium  Sized 
Enterprises (“SMEs”), with over 65.0% (2021: 60.0%) of this 
originating from our online portal. 

In the UK, the Bank lent £150.0 million (2021: £114.1 million) 
in its Structured Finance division, which has been identified as 
a future key area of growth for the Bank.  These products are 
designed  in  such  a  manner  as  to  provide  the  Bank  with 
additional  collateral  enhancements.  This  allows  the  Bank  to 
hold lower loss provisions, supporting its demonstrable history 
of safe lending in this market.  

With Government guarantee support schemes tapering off, it 
is  encouraging  to  see our  UK  SME  Broker  division  return  to 
pre-Covid  levels  of  lending  of  £30.9  million  (2021:  £11.1 
million). These guarantee schemes were an important lending 
stream for the Bank. 

The Bank continues to seek acquisitions that provide access 
to niche lending markets in the UK. By owning the customer, 
the Bank continued its strategy to reduce its reliance on other 
introducers and their expensive commissions. In the last year, 
I am pleased to say that whilst interest income increased by 
£3.3  million 
(2021:  £22.0  million), 
commissions  decreased  by  6.6%,  or  £0.3  million,  to  £3.2 
million (2021: £3.5 million).  

to  £25.3  million 

The Bank’s Isle of Man depositor base remains very loyal, with 
a retention rate in excess of 78.0% (2021: 70.0%). Whilst we 
continue to introduce new products for this market, it remains 
our  intention  to  reduce  our  on-Island  reliance.  As  such,  we 
have  embarked  on  an  application  to  the  PRA  to  raise  UK 
deposits through a UK Branch licence.  

During the year, the Bank continued to attract deposits to fund 
lending,  with  deposits  from  customers  increasing  to  £304.2 
million (2021: £253.5 million), improving the Loan-to-Deposit 
ratio efficiency to 96.0% (2021: 92.5%). This helped to offset 
the rising interest rates, driven by the Bank of England base 
rate  increases  in  its  attempt  to  curb  inflation.  The  Bank’s 
average cost of funds at the end of the year had increased to 
2.4%  (2021:  1.5%).  The  Bank  continues  to  hold  significant 
cash reserves and debt securities totalling £57.9 million (2021: 
£58.5 million).  

Turning to overheads, personnel expenses increased by £1.0 
million, reflecting the additional staff costs associated with our 
UK growth strategy, but overall, overheads decreased to £8.0 
million (2021: £8.3 million). Despite loan book growth of £57.7 
million, provisioning decreased by £0.9 million to £3.4 million 
(2021:  £4.3  million),  reflecting  the  emergence  from  Covid 
related  stresses 
the  credit  book.  Depreciation  and 
amortisation narrowly fell by £0.1 million to £0.5 million (2021: 
£0.6 million). In total, the Bank’s cost base increased by £0.6 
million to £13.8 million (2021: £13.2 million), but driven by the 
increase  in  Net  Interest  Margin,  the  Bank’s  profit  before  tax 
margin increased by 3.4% to 8.2% (2021: 4.8%). 

in 

Total  assets  grew  by  £57.9  million  to  £354.7  million  (2021: 
£296.8  million),  a  growth  of  19.5%.  Shareholder  funds 
increased by £3.4 million to £34.6 million (2021: £31.2 million). 
The CET1 ratio reduced by 2.8% to 12.4% (2021: 15.2%), in 
line with loan book growth – a figure which is a prudent 3.9% 
above the Bank’s regulatory minimum of 8.5%.  

Edgewater Associates Limited 
We have re-focused and resourced this business to meet the 
demands  of  legislation  relating  to  the  provision  of  regulated 
financial  advice  on  the  Isle  of  Man.  In  addition,  through  a 
project to improve our technology, our customer segmentation 
will  allow  an  improved  customer  focused  journey,  which  will 
also  deliver  operational  efficiencies.  In  light  of  these  two 
projects,  revenue  and  profitability  has  remained 
fairly 
consistent year-on-year.  

Manx FX Limited 
Our foreign exchange advisory continued to perform positively 
and recorded a record profit for the year of £1.4 million (2021: 
£1.2 million), with a marginal reduction in its Cost-to-Income 
ratio to 18.5% (2020: 18.8%). This is a highly cash-generative 
business which contributed £1.8 million (2021: £1.0 million) to 
the Group’s treasury.  

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited 
Despite  the  challenging  economic  environment,  Blue  Star 
grew its brokered lending in the year by £0.7 million to £15.0 
million (2021: £14.3 million). Of the total advanced, the Bank 
wrote £7.6 million (2021: £8.8 million), with the balance being 
passed  to  other  funders  –  this  business  model  will  be 
developed in 2023 as a safe haven for growth for the Group. 

Page | 5  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

The  business  was  profitable  in  its own  right  and contributed 
£0.7  million  (2021:  £0.5  million)  to  the  Group’s  operating 
income this year. 

Our Executive team will continue to protect our business and 
to  maximise  opportunities  as  they  arise,  whether  they  be 
through organic growth or accretive acquisitions.  

Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited  
The  business  continued  to  be  the  largest  fermentation  tank 
lessor in the UK brewing market with a fleet size of 278 (2021: 
261), providing 1.3 million litres of brewing capacity (2021: 1.2 
million litres). 

A key measure of performance is the deployment of its fleet, 
which  is  currently  81.0%  (2021:  88.0%).  The  business,  in 
addition  to  being  profitable  in  its  own  right,  generated  £1.7 
million (2021: £1.4 million) to the Group’s income this year. 

The Business Lending Exchange Limited 
This is the first year in consolidating the full-year results of the 
Business Lending Exchange. Its loan book grew to £8.3 million 
(2021: £5.0 million) and its Group contribution of profit before 
tax  increased  to  £0.5  million  (2021:  £0.1  million).  When 
eliminating  the  impact  of  intra-group  funding,  the  business 
contributed £1.1 million to Group profitability.  

This  business  specialises  in  prudent  lending  through  its 
experienced  management  team  to  the  profitable  sub-prime 
SME  market,  a  sector  to  which  the  Bank  lacked  meaningful 
access.  

Payment Assist Limited 
On 21 September 2022, the Group announced its acquisition 
of 50.1% of Payment Assist’s shares. Payment Assist (“PAL”) 
was incorporated in 2013 to capitalise on the opportunity in the 
automotive sector to improve garage customer retention rates 
by providing a user-friendly method of enabling customers to 
spread their payments over a small period of time.  

Since the acquisition, PAL has contributed £0.7 million of profit 
before tax. The PAL acquisition shows every sign that this will 
be  a  significantly  profitable  operation  and  an  important 
contributor to the Group’s profitability in the coming years. 

Outlook 
The set of results within this report demonstrates the value of 
the Group’s diversified portfolio.  

For our banking and lending subsidiaries, we will continue our 
strategy of investing in resilient and profitable growth sectors, 
which  will  allow  us  to  protect  our  Net  Interest  Margin.  By 
broadening  our  access  to  liquidity  through  our  UK  branch 
deposit-taking licence application, we will be able to arbitrage 
deposit rates to maximise this margin for the future.  On the 
asset side of our balance sheet, demand for our products in 
both the Isle of Man and UK remains strong, and as a result, I 
would expect our 2023 Interim lending to be in excess of that 
reported  in  2022’s  equivalent  period.  With  the  economic 
outlook  suggesting  a  shallower,  shorter  recession  than 
predicted in 2022, provisioning going forward should not be in 
excess of our historical norm.  

In summary, our various business streams are well-positioned 
to support the growth in profitability for this year. Our Executive 
team will continue to safeguard each of these and to maximise 
suitable opportunities as they arise, whether they be through 
organic growth or accretive acquisitions. 

Board changes 
Whilst there has been no changes to your Board of Directors 
since  the  announcement  of  our  Interim  results,  I  would  like 
again to put on record my sincere thanks to David Gibson, who 
retired  after  thirteen  years serving  this  Board  and  five  years 
acting as Chairman of our banking subsidiary. 

Conclusion  
Finally, I would like to thank each of our staff for their hard work 
and dedication in making this splendid result possible. I would 
also 
fellow  shareholders  and  other 
stakeholders for their enduring loyalty and support. 

thank  my 

like 

to 

Jim Mellon 
Executive Chairman 
20 March 2023 

Page | 6  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY 

MFG has subsidiaries engaged in a suite of financial services 
based in the Isle of Man and the UK. These companies offer 
financial  services  to  both  retail  and  commercial  customers. 
MFG's  strategy  is  to  grow  organically  and  through  strategic 
acquisition to  further augment the range of services it  offers 
and  gain  market  share  in  sectors  in  which  it  has  proven 
experience.  A  summary  of  the  strategic  objectives  for  each 
principal subsidiary is set out below. 

Conister Bank Limited (“Bank”) and Conister (“CFL”) 
The  Bank’s  Board  of  Directors  (“Bank’s  Board”)  has  set 
strategic  objectives,  aligned  to  its  strategic  plan.  These 
objectives  provide  the  framework  for  setting  risk  appetite 
statements and tolerances for all material risks. The strategic 
objectives set are: 

  Maintain capital adequacy; 
  Deliver stable earnings growth; 
  Secure  stable  and  efficient  access  to  funding  and 

 

liquidity; 
Treat  customers  fairly  with  the  highest  service 
standard possible 

  Maintain stakeholder confidence; and 
  Progress  its  Environmental  Social and  Governance 

(“ESG”) strategy. 

These strategic objectives provide the link between the Bank’s 
strategic planning and its risk management framework, using 
risk appetite statements, measures and tolerances, to control 
risk on a day-to-day basis and are reviewed at-least annually 
and  approved  by  the  Bank’s  Board.  Key  in  considering  the 
Bank’s  judgement  of  appetites  is  its  assessment  of  its 
regulatory environment both in the Isle of Man (“IOM”) and the 
UK; the IOM deposit market; access to regulatory capital; the 
IOM and UK credit markets; the suitability of its product range; 
concentrations of advances and historic arrears. The aim is to 
deliver controlled growth, by providing adequate returns with 
strong credit profiles.  

Having considered the above in light of the residual economic 
impacts of COVID-19 pandemic, Brexit and the war in Europe, 
drawing  on  both  internal  and  external  resources,  the  Bank 
continues to believe the credit markets in which it operates will 
deliver  growth  with  liquidity  sourced  from  both  its  Balance 
Sheet and the IOM’s substantial deposit base. This growth will 
be  achieved  through  the  organic  expansion  of  existing 
products,  including participating  in  IOM and  UK government 
business  support  schemes,  and  through  acquisition.  This 
strategy can be analysed by the geographical area the Bank 
operates within, namely the IOM and the UK. 

The  Bank  is  proud  of  its  heritage  and  remains  heavily  IOM 
centric but recognises that, as its UK loan book grows, it will 
need to create a more substantial UK presence to manage and 
grow this aspect of its business. 

Sourcing  reliable  funding  underpins  the  Bank’s  growth 
objectives.  The  Bank’s  strategy  in  this  area  is  to  secure  a 
diversified, low-cost suite of liquidity alternatives to draw upon 
in  order  to  support  its  lending  strategy.  The  IOM  deposit 
market  remains  a  key  source  of  liquidity  which  the  Bank 
accesses  through  its  fixed-term  deposit  and  notice  account 
products.  The  Bank  has  applied  to  be  a  UK  deposit  taker 
through  a  Prudential  Regulation  Authority  (“PRA”)  and 
Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”) Branch licence. 

The Bank recognises that it has an opportunity to increase its 
in  competition 
market  share  because  of  the  reduction 
experienced in this market and / or by increasing interest rates. 
As  such,  the  Bank  believes  that  it  has  sufficient  reliable 
alternatives  to  be  confident  that  it  can  raise  the  necessary 
deposits when required.  

The Bank’s acquisition strategy is to increase market share in 
sectors within which it already operates or to gain access to a 
desirable  market  through  an  existing  reputable,  profitable 
operator.  

Regarding the former, the Bank continues to enjoy a positive 
lending experience within the structured finance and UK credit 
broker market and currently has circa £220 million of net loans 
outstanding.  

The Bank’s decision in 2022 to include Environmental, Social, 
and  Corporate  Governance  (“ESG”)  within  its  strategic 
objectives  has  seen  great  progress  being  made  in  the  year. 
The Bank published  its first Sustainability Report setting  out 
its material ESG issues and objectives, work completed and 
ESG  performance.  This  report  can  be  found  on  the  Bank’s 
website, www.conisterbank.co.im.  

The  Bank’s  programme  of  ESG  integration  and  its  ESG 
stewardship in its external relationships has seen the Bank:  

  Adopt and champion five United Nations Sustainable 

Development Goals: 

o  Good Health & Well Being;  
o  Affordable & Clean Energy;  
o  Decent Work and Economic Growth;  
o  Sustainable Cities & Communities; and  
o  Climate Action.  

  Adopt a green finance strategy in the provision of its 

services; 

  Recognise 

the  UN  principles 

for  Responsible 

Banking; 

  Become  a  supporter  of  the  Task  Force  on  Climate 

Related Financial Disclosures; 

  Undertake and continue with annual carbon footprint 

 

and greenhouse gas emissions assessments; and 
Implement an ESG integration plan and programme 
regular 
the  Bank 
of  work  across 
engagement  with  staff,  customers,  and  other 
stakeholders on ESG. 

including 

MFX Limited (“MFX”) 
The strategic objectives of MFX are: 

 

 

 

To be the first choice for international payments and 
foreign exchange of corporations in the IOM; 
To  maintain,  develop  and  strengthen  existing 
relationships;  
To  increase  the  number  of  referrals  to  their  foreign 
exchange  business  partners  with  a  view  of 
onboarding new accounts. 

MFX target customers are corporates and private clients who 
have  a 
international  payment 
requirement via its UK foreign exchange providers. 

foreign  exchange  and 

Page | 7  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY 

The IOM offers a diversified range of industries and sectors. 
For  the  next  12  months  MFX  will  concentrate  its  efforts  in 
developing  new  business  opportunities  both  on  IOM  and  in 
other jurisdictions.  

  Established clients - wealth management, retirement 

planning; and 

  General insurance clients - home, travel, commercial 

and specialist. 

MFX can negotiate upfront agreed foreign exchange margins 
and ensure price transparency, underpinning the professional 
relationship  it provides. The international payment fees offer 
competitive value compared with local high street banks. 

Payment Assist Limited (“PAL”) 
PAL provides the option  for customers to spread the cost of 
ad-hoc expenses over monthly instalments through a range of 
fee free, interest free or interest-bearing products. The Group 
acquired an initial 50.1% of PAL in May 2022. 

The  strategy  is  to  build  and  develop  the  business  by 
continuing  to  be  the  largest  finance  provider  in  the  UK 
automotive  aftermarket  whilst  diversifying  into  alternative 
markets offering both short term and longer-term finance. This 
expansion will be executed on a selective basis with business 
partners  who  share  our  values  for  the  highest  level  of 
customer service. 

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited (“BBSL”) 
The strategic  objectives  of  BBSL  are  to  continue  to  grow  its 
direct  model  to  niche  suppliers  through  the  distribution  of 
government guaranteed schemes whilst growing its traditional 
pipeline to allow it to migrate to its ordinary course of business 
as these schemes conclude.   

BBSL will expand its panel of alternative funders, apart from 
the  Bank,  to  place  loans  to  further  maximise  its  sources  of 
revenue.  

EAL  has  an  active  client  base  of  approximately  7,000  with 
associated  assets  under  advice  of  £319 million  (2021:  £368 
million). 

Whilst  EAL  will  continue  to  grow  and  develop  its  standard 
business  model,  it  is  always  open  to  new  opportunities.  It 
remains nimble and ready to move in line with economic and 
regulatory  changes  as  they  arise.  Its  team  remains  current 
with industry standards and trends.  It retains an appetite  for 
growth, either through additional acquisition opportunities that 
may  arise,  or  via  organic  growth  from  existing  clients  and 
business partners with whom it has built strong relationships. 

Diversification  opportunities  are  encouraged  and  pursued, 
including  the  successful  programme  to  develop  bespoke 
Employee  Benefit  Group  Schemes.  These  incorporate  staff 
pensions  (including  pension  freedom),  protection,  private 
medical, and death in service cover. 

trains 

talented  people 

EAL 
into  rounded, 
professionally qualified advisers who can fit within succession 
planning  opportunities.  To  supplement  this,  it  also  recruits 
quality  experienced  advisers  and  para-planners  who  can 
further enhance its team. 

to  progress 

Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited (“Ninkasi”) 
This  business  remains  well  positioned  to  gain  additional 
market share through its unique equipment leasing options for 
the brewing industry.   

Finally, BBSL will continue to develop its sales force to allow 
greater market penetration.  

Edgewater Associates Limited (“EAL”) 
EAL  is  regulated  by  the  Isle  of  Man  Financial  Services 
Authority (“FSA”). Its strategic objectives are to: 

In addition, Ninkasi is considering expanding its coverage to 
include  Europe,  either  by  a  direct  distribution  strategy,  or  in 
partnership with a complementary business. 

Further, Ninkasi will manage its utilisation demand through the 
acquisition of additional fermentation tanks. 

  Provide superior service to its client base; 
Increase assets under advice; and 
 
  Grow and develop its staff skill set. 

EAL is a full-service IFA practice with a diverse mix of clients 
requiring a broad range of products and solutions covering: 

First time buyers - mortgages; 

 
  Newly  qualified  professionals  -  protection,  savings, 

school fees; 

The Business Lending Exchange Limited (“BLX”) 
BLX will continue to grow their loan book prudently in existing 
markets  through  the  UK  credit  broker  network,  utilising 
existing market to offer attractive asset-backed products in a 
customer focused way to ensure the best possible customer 
outcome. 

Page | 8  

 
 
 
                                                                                                                 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE (“ESG”) REPORT 

The Group 
The Group, through its subsidiary the Bank, has published its first ESG and Sustainability Report, demonstrating its commitment to 
ensuring its business activities have a positive impact not just for clients and shareholders, but also for employees, society, and the 
environment. Two of its key business objectives, stable growth and service, rely on a recognition of its own responsibility to make a 
positive societal impact. The world is in the middle of a profound transition when it comes to sustainability, and the Group recognises 
the role it must play in that transition. This means operating with a strong emphasis on its environmental and social impact, and on 
its governance procedures. The Group has a solid system of corporate governance in place, endorsing the principles of openness, 
integrity and accountability which underlie best practice. The Group operates to high standards of corporate accountability with an 
effective Board and Board committees. Taking a long-term view, the Group recognises that, as a business, its carbon footprint must 
move towards net-zero over time. This reduction is not just an environmental imperative, but a business one as well. It is committed 
to having net zero carbon emissions by 2030. 

The  Group  started  its  ESG  project  in  2019  through  its  principal  subsidiary,  the  Bank,  both  by  measuring  its  carbon  footprint  and 
approving its ESG strategy. The former provides a base year to measure performance against as 2020 was not considered to provide 
a representative comparison year due to the impact of the pandemic on office working and travel. The latter, having consulted with 
advisors, provides an agreed pathway based upon internationally accepted principles to achieving the Bank’s ambition of being net 
zero by 2030.  

With the Bank having proven the concept, the Group will widen the ESG policy to include all wholly owned operational subsidiaries 
by the end of 2023. 

The Bank  
The  Bank’s  employees  and  culture  set  it  apart  from  others  in  our  industry.  As  a  small  bank,  employees  are  at  the  centre  of  its 
consideration.  Along  with  a  range  of  structured  internal  wellbeing  programmes,  it  has  also  introduced  flexible  working  where 
appropriate,  recognising  that  there  are  substantial  benefits  from  balancing  office  working  with  working  from  home.  The  Flexible 
Working Policy was introduced to enable the business and its employees to benefit from a practical combination of office and remote 
working. The Bank has revised the dress code to reflect both the changing nature of the workplace and its broad and diverse client 
base. It engaged a third party to undertake an annual gender review which is presented to the Bank’s board and it undertakes an 
annual employee engagement survey to instruct its employee policies and benefits which helps it to attract the best talent. 

The Bank’s Credit Policy sets out its limited appetite for financial and reputational risk emanating from climate change, which includes 
physical risk, such as extreme weather, flooding, and transitional risk, such as changes to law, policy, regulation, and culture. The 
Bank adopts a favourable stance towards a low carbon economy and lending propositions that have a neutral or positive impact on 
the environment / climate. The Bank will also consider the impact on public perception and potential impact on ongoing demand for 
clients’ products and services, as well as any impact on its underlying security. 

The Bank supports philanthropy. It gives back to its local communities and to causes it believes in both as a Group and locally it has 
supported young entrepreneurs, sports people, charities and it promotes fundraising throughout the Group. 

Since the commencement of its ESG strategy, for scopes 1 and 2 of the GHG Protocol, the Bank’s carbon footprint has decreased 
by 73% to 37.3 tonnes of CO2 compared to its 2019 baseline. The Group works with ESG external consultants to assist the Group in 
monitoring its progress independently.  

This saving is the equivalent of the annual energy consumption of 13 UK homes. Whilst this is encouraging, there are still areas where 
the Bank can improve. 

The Bank’s approach has been measured using Scientific Based Targets (“SBT”). Whilst the SBT approach provides three broad 
climate change scenarios, the Bank’s strategy is aligned to its most stringent, that of, global warming of no more than 1.5 degrees. 
To achieve this goal, the Bank will need to focus on three key areas: 

  A reduction in its energy consumption and engage with energy suppliers to reduce their reliance on fossil fuels; 
  Using proven technology, the Bank can reduce its business travel emissions and its electricity consumption in relation to its 

 

IT hardware; and  
The  Bank  will  fund  forestry  planting  on  Island  for  the  provision  of  future  carbon  credits  for  both  itself  and  other  local 
businesses. 

The Bank’s ESG and Sustainability report is available online at conisterbank.co.im. 

Page | 9  

 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

Risk management overview 
Effective risk management is crucial to MFG’s sustainability. 
The  MFG  Board  of  Directors 
is  ultimately 
accountable for the effective governance of risk management. 
The Board maintains its oversight and responsibilities in terms 
of the three lines of defence risk governance model as set out 
below.  

(“Board”) 

Determining the  Group’s risk tolerance  and appetite through 
enterprise  risk  management  is  a  key  element  of  MFG’s 
corporate  governance  framework.  It  is  primarily  designed  to 
assist the Group in enhancing its corporate governance and 
intended to reinforce the key elements of Quoted Companies 
Alliance  (“QCA  Code”)  corporate  governance  principles, 
adopted by the Group.  

A fundamental principle contained in the Code, is for effective 
risk  management:  MFG  has  in  place  a  Risk  Management 
Framework (“RMF”) to support the implementation of some of 
the  principles  of  the  MFG  Governance  Framework  at  the 
subsidiary  level.  The  RMF  supports  the  Board  and  senior 
management  in  fulfilling  their  respective  duties  in  relation  to 
the  sustainable  operation  of  the  business.  This  includes  the 
integration  of  ESG  in  the  business.  The  risk  management 
system  is  supported  by  policies,  processes  and  activities 
relating to the taking, management and reporting of risk. 

Management and accountability 
The  Audit,  Risk  and  Compliance  Committee  (“ARCC”)  is 
operated at a Group and Bank level and currently comprises 
of  three  experienced  Independent  Non-executive  Directors, 
two of which are qualified accountants. Only members of the 
ARCC  have  the  right  to  attend  ARCC  meetings  to  allow  for 
independence.  However,  other 
representing 
Executive  Management,  Risk,  Compliance  and  Internal  and 
External  Audit  are  invited  by  the  Chairman  of  the  ARCC  to 
attend all or part of any meeting as and when appropriate. 

individuals 

The main objectives of the ARCC are to review operations and 
ensure  that  they  are  conducted  to  the  highest  possible 
standards. This is accomplished by providing an independent 
objective assurance function specifically for, but not limited to: 
Internal  Controls  and  Risk  Management  Systems; 
Whistleblowing  and  Fraud;  Risk  and  Compliance;  Internal 
Audit and External Audit. 

It  provides  oversight  of  compliance  with  all  legislation, 
regulation, and applicable codes of practice in the jurisdictions 
that  MFG  conducts  business;  and 
reviews  policies, 
procedures and processes to effectively identify, quantify and 
manage all material risks and to advise on best practice. 

RMF 
The  following  overview  of  the  key  governance  components 
that  make  up  the  MFG  system  of  governance  illustrates  the 
crucial role of the RMF:  

RMF - Culture 
The  risk  culture,  which  forms  part  of  MFG’s  overall  culture, 
encompasses the tone at the top of the organisation and a set 
of  shared  attitudes,  values,  behaviours,  and  practices  that 
characterise how individuals at MFG consider risk in their day-
to-day business activities. Analysis of previous incidents and 
ongoing  assessment  ensure  continuous  improvement  in  the 
management of risk.  

All  individuals  are  trained  to  understand  the  importance  of 
effective  risk  management  and  ensure  that  risks  associated 
with  their  role  are  appropriately  understood,  managed  and 
reported.  Individuals  at  all  levels  communicate  risk  related 
insights in a timely, transparent, and honest manner. 

through  how 

This culture is driven from the top by the Board and Executive 
Management 
they  communicate,  make 
decisions, and motivate the business. Managers and leaders 
ensure that in all their actions and behaviours they continually 
reinforce the culture that the effective management of risk is 
critical to MFG’s success and that every individual plays a role 
in the management of risk. 

RMF - Appetite 
Risk  appetites  are  currently  only  set  at  subsidiary  level  and 
determine the maximum amount of risk that it is prepared to 
accept in the pursuit of delivering business objectives. The risk 
appetite considers all the risks detailed under “Principal risks”-  
on  page  12  and  is  reviewed  annually,  and,  as  the  operating 
environment changes, it is constantly measured against stated 
appetite to take appropriate action.   

RMF - Risk identification, measurement, and control 
Having  a  robust  understanding  of  the  risks  to  which  the 
business is exposed is crucial to ensure that all material risks 
are  appropriately  monitored,  managed,  and  reported  on.  An 
understanding of risk is developed through the identification, 
assessment and, where appropriate, measurement of risks to 
which the business is exposed.  

These  processes  are  performed  as  part  of  strategy  setting, 
strategy execution and day-to-day operations and are referred 
to  as risk and control assessments. The Risk team provides 
tools  to  aid  managers  and  individuals  in  developing  an 
their  respective  business 
understanding  of  risk  within 
responsibilities. 

The  risk  and  control  assessment  process  of  understanding 
risk and reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of related 
controls  and  risk  mitigation  approaches  is  performed  on  a 
regular basis, as a minimum annually, and is reported to and 
governed by: 

  A high-level assessment to identify the principal risks 
enabling  work  to  progress  in  a  focused  manner  in 
completing risk and control assessments, to build a 
key control monitoring programme; 

  Management Committees, including a review of roles 
and responsibilities, ensure that all material risks are 
captured  and 
to 
presentation to the ARCC and the Board; 

formally  considered  prior 

  Procedures  within  the  framework  ensure  that  the 
relevant Management Committee is accountable for 
the policies that support their risk, and to reduce the 
workload for the ARCC and the Board, enabling them 
to focus on overseeing and challenging the RMF; and 

  Board  approved  risk  appetite  statements,  and  the 
design  of  an  underlying  risk  appetite  measures 
framework,  to  be  owned  and  monitored  by  the 
relevant Management Committee. 

Page | 10  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

RMF - Three lines of defence and key assurance functions  
As  part  of  its  overall  RMF,  MFG  has  adopted  best  practice 
monitoring and control mechanisms by implementing the three 
lines of defence governance and combined assurance model. 
Thus  the  responsibility  for  governance  and  oversight  is 
allocated  throughout  the  organisation  according  to the  three 
lines of defence principles.   

This  governance  model  is  regarded  as  international  best 
practice for ensuring good governance (including governance 
within risk and capital management) across an organisation. 
The  emphasis 
is  placed  on  ownership,  responsibility, 
independence,  assurance,  communication,  oversight,  and 
transparency across MFG’s governance.  

The  term  ‘key  assurance  function’  refers  to  a  properly 
authorised function, whether in the form of a person, unit, or 
department,  serving  as  a  control  or  ‘checks  and  balances’ 
function from a governance perspective, and which carries out 
such activities.  These functions typically are second and third 
line of defence functions.  

First line of defence  
The  first  line  of  defence  e.g.,  business  management  is 
primarily  accountable  for  the  day-to-day  risk  origination  and 
management in accordance with risk policy and strategy. This 
includes 
implementing 
responses.    

identifying,  assessing  risks,  and 

Second line of defence  
The second line of defence is responsible for the development 
and maintenance of the frameworks and policies. The second 
line  provides  oversight  of,  and  challenge  to,  the  first  line  of 
defence and drives the implementation of the frameworks and 
policies. 

Third line of defence  
The  third  line  of  defence  is  the  independent  assurance 
function  providing  overall  assurance 
the  Board  on 
governance, risk management, and internal controls. The third 
line of defence comprises of internal audit, external audit, and 
other  independent  assurance  providers.    The  third  line  of 
defence is completely independent from the management of 
the day-to-day business activities. 

to 

RMF - MFG assurance functions  
MFG has effective systems of risk management and internal 
control.  The  tasks,  processes  and  obligations  of  the  key 
assurance functions are transparent and clearly defined, with 
regular exchange of information between the functions. Each 
of  the  functions  is  structured  to  ensure  that  it  has  the 
necessary authority, independence, resources, expertise and 
access  to  the  Board  and  all  relevant  employees  and 
information to exercise its authority.  The minimum assurance 
departments within MFG include:  

  Risk management function;   
  Compliance function; and 
Internal Audit function.  
 

The  departmental  head  of  each  of  these  key  functions 
possesses  the  necessary  skills,  experience  and  knowledge 
required for the specific positions they exercise and meet all 
suitability and ‘fit and proper’ requirements. Written guidelines 

for these functions are in place, and compliance with them is 
assured  on  a  regular  basis.    All    of  the  key  independent 
functions within MFG have a direct reporting line to the ARCC 
and the Board.  

RMF  -  Internal  Capital  Adequacy  Assessment  Process 
(“ICAAP”) 
Overview 
ICAAP  is  a  key  strategic  and  risk  management  tool  for  the 
Bank.  It  is  a  key component of  the  Bank’s  planning  process 
during the short and medium-term. The Bank’s lead regulator, 
the  FSA,  requires  the  Bank  to  establish  and  maintain  an 
ongoing  internal  adequacy  assessment  process  which  is 
appropriate to the nature and scale of its business and reviews 
that process annually and evidences that review. 

Methodology 
The Bank’s ICAAP process is as follows: 

Formulation of the Bank’s strategy and budget  
Strategic  plans  are  prepared  annually  for  the  forthcoming 
year,  which  consider  the  Bank’s  risk  appetite,  key  market 
sectors to target, products to leverage / introduce, headcount, 
operational and capital investment required. 

Risk assessment 
The Executive Team will liaise with the Risk and Compliance 
department to determine the material risks in the Bank based 
on  incidents  and  breaches,  Internal  Audit  reports,  Risk  and 
Compliance report findings and issues raised at the Board and 
Committee meetings. 

Stress testing and reverse stress testing 
The  Finance  department  uses  Bank  of  England  market 
assumptions  for  stress  testing  and  stress  the  five-year 
forecasts  to  identify  any  capital  deficiencies.  Reverse  stress 
testing  is  also  used  based  on  the  assumption  that  the  Bank 
ceases to trade, coupled with a run-off scenario to determine 
the capital distribution.  

Reverse stress testing is used to explore the vulnerabilities to 
extreme adverse events in the Bank’s strategy and plans that 
might  cause  the  business  to  fail,  in  order  to  facilitate 
contingency planning. 

Calculation of capital requirement and buffers 
Following the setting of strategy, risk assessment and stress 
tests, the Bank will then calculate its capital requirements by 
considering the following areas: 

  Pillar  I  –  The  calculation  is  based  on  the  minimum 
regulatory requirement under Pillar I of 10.0% of risk 
weighted assets for material risks; 

  Pillar II – Assessment of any additional business risks 
not covered by the minimum Pillar I requirement, plus 
an  assessment  of  Pillar  II  risks  based  upon  the 
current material risk assessment and stress tests, to 
determine whether any additional capital buffers are 
deemed appropriate; 

  Pillar  III  –  Pillar  III  establishes  measures  to  make 
better use of market discipline. Pillar III applies only 
at the top consolidated level of a banking group and 
is therefore generally not considered to be applicable 

Page | 11  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

to  IOM  incorporated  banks  as  per  FSA  ICAAP 
guidance; and  

  Buffers  –  The  Bank  assesses  its  position  against 
industry  standards 
regulatory  buffers  and 
for 
calculates its position based on its overall exposures 
to different jurisdictions. 

Review, challenge and adoption of the ICAAP 
The  ICAAP  is  prepared  by  the  Finance  department  in 
conjunction  with  the  Risk  and  Compliance  department,  and 
reviewed  by  the  Bank’s  Executive  Team,  Risk  Management 
Committee, ARCC, Internal Audit and the External Auditor. It 
is  used  to measure  and  benchmark  the  Bank’s  risk appetite 
and to forecast capital usage under both stressed and normal 
conditions. The ICAAP is challenged at all stages of the review 
process  and  presented  to  the  Bank’s  Board  by  ARCC  for 
approval  prior to  being  submitted  to  the  FSA.  The  ICAAP  is 
regularly  reviewed  and  updated  throughout  the  year  by 
management and referred to the ARCC and the Bank’s Board. 

ICAAP Results 
The  Bank  has  completed  its  ICAAP  testing  for  2022  in 
compliance with regulatory requirements. Despite the severity 
of the risk scenarios modelled, the Bank satisfied the capital 
and leverage requirements for the purpose of the stress test.  

Principal risks 
As a result of the RMF, identified on pages 10 to 11, the Group 
has exposure to the following key risks: 

  Strategic; 
  Credit risk including counterparty credit;  
  Operational risk including regulatory; 
  Conduct; 
Liquidity; 
 
Interest rate; 
 
  Regulatory; and 
  Reputation. 

The  Group  has  considered  the  above  key  risks  that  it  faces 
and the mitigating controls against those risks: 

Strategic risk 
Strategic  risk  is  the  risk  to  the  Group’s  revenue  and 
operational  costs  as  set  within  the  budget  and  the  medium-
term plans arising through sub-optimal implementation of the 
strategic plan  due to  either internal or external  factors faced 
by its subsidiaries. 

Controls and mitigation 
The  Group  controls  and  mitigates  this  risk  via  a  number  of 
measures: 

  Subsidiaries  generally  commence 

formal 
planning  process  in  September  for  the  forthcoming 
year,  to  inform  the  budget  submitted  to  the  boards 
throughout  the  Group  for  approval.  In  reality,  the 
planning  process  is  continuous  and  responsive  to 
change in the internal and external environment; 

their 

  Barriers to delivering the strategic plan, and changes 
to  planned  activity  are  captured  in  the  various 
subsidiary  ‘Managing  Directors’  Reports’  which  are 
submitted  to  their  respective  boards  and  then 
ultimately reported to the Group Board at each Board 

meeting. The reports take account of input from the 
Group  Executive  Directors  and  current  financial 
performance  versus  budget  and  seek  to  highlight 
strategic responses for the relevant subsidiary; 

  Key  strategic  projects  are  managed  under  formal 
project  governance  with  progress  of  key  projects 
tracked, and communicated and discussed at regular 
project meetings; and 

 

regulator 

restriction  on 

The  impact  of  limited  capital,  liquidity,  operational 
the 
capacity,  and 
achievement of strategy is captured by the planning 
process, with exceptional items dealt with under the 
relevant  risk  category,  where  the  impact  on  risk 
appetite  and  mitigating  actions  will  be  formally 
recorded.  

Credit risk including counterparty credit risk 
Credit risk is defined as the risk that counterparties fail to fulfil 
their  contractual  obligations.  A  material  decline  in  credit 
quality, or the failure of a counterparty, could result in higher 
levels  of  arrears  and  ultimately  in  increased  provisions  and 
write-offs, which impacts upon profitability, potentially eroding 
the capital position for the Group’s subsidiaries.  

Controls and mitigations applied 

  Delegated  authorities:  The  Group  operates  to  a 
schedule  of  delegated  lending  authorisation  limits 
linked  to  an individual underwriter’s knowledge and 
experience.  This  is  bolstered  by  validations  of  all 
significant  credit  exposures  over  set  limits  and 
ongoing  monitoring  of  credit  positions  of  key 
suppliers and intermediary networks; 

  Distribution  strategy:  The  Group  actively  monitors 
and controls the credit risk of all business undertaken 
to ensure that it is treating customers fairly and as a 
safeguard  against  the  failure  of  any  business 
relationship.  Mitigation  of  counterparty  credit  risk  is 
supported 
the  maintenance,  where 
appropriate, of cash reserves and loss pools to fund 
any  buy-back 
indemnity.  Comprehensive  due 
diligence processes are also performed;  

through 

  Monitoring  of  credit  quality  exposure:  The  Group 
monitors  its  credit  risk  exposures  via  an  internal 
credit  risk  grading  methodology  that  assigns  each 
individual  exposure  with  one  of  three  credit  grades 
based upon the probability of default at product and 
distribution  channel  level.  This  allows  for  better 
monitoring  of  credit  quality  and  impairment  of  its 
current book as well as forecasting and stress testing 
on a more accurate basis;  

  Concentration 

of 

materially 

the 
exposures  where 

risk:  To  protect  against 
build-up 
could 

unintentional 
deterioration 
the Group’s sustainability and profitability. The Group 
seeks  to  maintain  a  diverse  portfolio  of  products 
across a variety of geographical regions, customers, 
sectors, and asset classes. This diversity protects the 
Group  against  any  deterioration  in  a  particular 
geographical  region,  the  economic  environment, 
commercial sector etc;   

impact                              

Page | 12  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

Operational risk including regulatory risks 
Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from human error, 
inadequate  or  failed  internal  processes  or  controls,  system 
failure, improper conduct, fraud, or external events. 

The  principal  operational  risks  for  the  Group  arise  from  the 
following areas: 

  Resilience of the IT environment: The IT environment 
is  under  constant 
review  ensure  operational 
continuity.  The  Group’s  IT  Steering  Committee 
(“ITSCO”)  identifies  and  implements  efficiencies  to 
enable  enhanced  customer  service  through  the 
provision of additional facilities and products, and to 
automate  manual 
to 
minimise the potential for human error. ITSCO also 
reviews  and  monitors  current  service  standards, 
highlighting 
and  mitigates 
accordingly. There are a number of exception reports 
and scheduled tasks on a daily basis to ensure that 
any controls within the IT systems are being reported 
on adequately; and 

tasks  wherever  possible 

any  deficiencies 

 

Third  Party  administration  services:  The  key 
operational controls ensure that partners are fulfilling 
their legal and  regulatory obligations in  accordance 
with  their  service-level  agreement  with  the  Group.  
The  Group  has  an  outsourcing  policy  to  ensure 
obligations are monitored and met. Internal reviews 
and  audits  are  conducted  on  counterparties  to 
ensure terms agreed are being adhered to. 

Controls and mitigation 

  Adherence to internal limits and approval processes 

through:  

o  Delegated authorities: The Group operates 
to  a  schedule  of  delegated  credit 
authorisation  limits  and  payment  approval 
limits,  linked  to  an  individual’s  knowledge 
and experience; 

o  Segregation of duties: There is appropriate 
those  authorising 
segregation  between 
transactions and those executing them, with 
four  eyes  principles 
in  place  where 
required; 
o  Exception 

reporting 
reporting:  Daily 
ensures  that  any  regulatory  and  internal 
limits  are 
the 
reviewed 
appropriate Management team; and 

regularly  by 

o  New Business approval policy: All material 
new  business  is  approved  in  line  with  a 
formally  approved  policy,  with  ultimate 
decision making resting with the applicable 
Executive Committee. 

  Change  control:  The  Group  ensures  that  both, 
changes to existing products and services and new 
products and services, are delivered in a controlled 
manner with the appropriate checks and controls in 
place; 

  Due diligence checks: The operational risk from the 
Group’s  third-party  administrators  is  mitigated  by  a 
comprehensive  due  diligence  process  which 
includes  a  comprehensive  take-on  appraisal  and  a 
full review of the partner’s policies, procedures and 
financial stability; 

  Key  Operational  Controls:  Key  controls  are 
monitored  through  a  combination  of  management 
oversight,  Risk  and  Compliance  monitoring  and 
Internal Audit reviews; 

  New  Business  Policy  and  Process:  New  business 
and material business change is outlined in a formal 
policy,  which 
that  a  sequence  of 
assessment and approval is followed. This ensures 
that all relevant input is included, and material risks 
considered; and 

requires 

  Exception  reports:  Exception  reporting  allows  the 
Group  to  identify  weaknesses  in  processes  and 
controls  which  in  turn  allows  for  adequate  training 
and the bolstering of systems and processes. 

Conduct risk 
The Group is exposed to conduct risk through its operations 
and  interactions  with  consumers,  either  directly  or  through 
third parties (brokers, or other counterparties). 

Controls and mitigation 
The  Group  has  policies  to  ensure  adherence  to  conduct 
related  regulatory standards  and  to  promote  continual  focus 
on good customer outcomes. Appropriate policies also govern 
where  good  conduct  is  contracted  to  third  parties,  either 
directly or through distribution chains. In all cases, compliance 
with  standards 
the 
relevant  data,  partner 
collection  and  assessment  of 
attestation, and onsite audits where appropriate. 

is  appropriately  monitored 

through 

General  conduct  principles  and  Treating  Customers  Fairly 
(TCF)  principles  are  well  embedded  across  the  Group’s 
the  new 
activities,  and  progress 
Consumer Duty is on target. 

towards  embedding 

Liquidity risk 
Financial institutions are subject to liquidity risk as an inherent 
part of their business. Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group 
may not hold sufficient liquid funds meaning it would be unable 
to meet its contractual liabilities as they fall due.  

Liquidity risk arises where the Group, through its subsidiaries, 
has  contractual  credit  obligations  that  can  be  placed  under 
stress  during  times  of  illiquidity.  Should  this  ever  occur,  the 
Group  would  access  the  capital  markets.  In  addition,  it  has 
built  a  core  portfolio  of  liquid  assets  or  buffers  as  additional 
sources of liquidity that can be utilised during such times.  

Controls and mitigation 
Overall, the Group’s liquidity profile is resistant to stress as the 
Group: 

  Onboarding: A comprehensive on-boarding process 
is  in  place  for  new  outsourced  partners  in  the  IOM 
and UK; 

  Has  a  positively  matched  funding  profile  and  does 
not  engage  in  maturity  transformation.  This  means 
that on a cumulative mismatch position, the Group is 

Page | 13  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

forecast to be able to meet all liabilities as they fall 
due;  

to  regulated  credit  activities,  and  other  specified  regulated 
products and services in the UK. 

  Maintains an adequate liquidity buffer; and 

  Has no exposure to the interbank lending market.  

The  Group’s  liquidity  position  is  monitored  daily  against 
internal  and  external  agreed  limits.  The  Group  also  has  a 
Liquidity  Contingency  Policy  and  Liquidity  Contingency 
Committee  should  a  liquidity  crisis  or  potential  liquidity 
disruption event ever occur.  

Interest rate risk 
Interest rate risk refers to the current or prospective risk to the 
Bank's capital and earnings arising from adverse movements 
in interest rates that affect the Bank's banking book positions. 

The  principal  potential  interest  rate  risk  that  the  Group  is 
exposed to  is the  risk that the Bank’s fixed interest rate and 
term profile of its deposit base differs materially from the fixed 
interest rate and term profile of its asset base.  

Controls and mitigation 

 

 

 

 

Funding profile: Interest rate risk for the Group is not 
deemed  to  be  material  currently  due  to  the  Bank’s 
positively matched funding profile. In a rising interest 
rate  environment,  due  to  the  nature  of  the  Group’s 
products  and  its  matched  funded  profile,  it  should 
theoretically  be  able  to  change  the  Bank’s  lending 
rate to match any corresponding change in its cost of 
funds;  

The  Bank  matches  its  deposit  taking  to  its  funding 
requirements to the greatest extent possible;  

The maturity profile of the Bank’s loan book through 
staged repayments means interest risk is difficult to 
hedge  effectively  so  the  Bank  does  not  currently 
hedge  against  this  risk,  and  is  not  exposed  to  any 
additional market interest rate risk in this respect; and 

Funding  cost:  The  Group  would  be  exposed  to 
potential  risk  if  the  Bank’s  cost  of  funds,  which  is 
linked to the cost of retail deposits, and ultimately the 
UK  banks’  base  rate,  was  to  increase  and  it  was 
unable, due to a competitive lending environment, to 
raise  its  lending  rate  correspondingly.  The  Group’s 
three-year plan allows  for  an  increase  in  its cost  of 
funds, but the Group accepts that these assumptions 
may not reflect the timing of any interest rate rise or 
the quantum of any increase.  

Regulatory risk 
Regulatory risk is the risk of material breach of regulation.  

The  risk  of  regulatory  breach  arises  through  a  failure  to 
identify, assess, and apply applicable regulation; or a failure 
to adhere to the applicable regulation as applied. 

The Group holds, via the Bank, a Class 1 (1) Banking Licence 
in  the  IOM  and  is  accordingly  regulated  by  the  Financial 
Services Authority (“FSA”). The Bank also holds permissions 
with the UK’s Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”) pertaining 

The Bank is in the process of applying for a UK deposit taking 
licence with the Prudential Regulatory Authority. 

The  Group  also  holds,  via  EWA,  an  IOM  Class  2  licence  to 
conduct  investment  business  and  is  licenced  as  a  general 
insurance intermediary, both regulated by the FSA. 

Other regulated entities in the Group are PAL, BLX and MCL 
principally for Consumer Credit and Debt Collection. 

The  risk  of  regulatory  breach  arises  through  a  failure  to 
identify, assess, and apply applicable regulation; or a failure 
to adhere to the applicable regulation as applied. 

Monitoring  and  complying  with  the  requirements  of  existing 
regulation across numerous regulatory bodies, along with the 
rapid pace and volume of regulatory change is a key risk. The 
risk is compounded due to the size of the Group. 

Controls and mitigation 
The  Group  remains  well  placed  to  meet  the  regulatory 
challenges that bring change to the macro environment.  

Regulatory risks continue to be mitigated by themed and ad-
hoc compliance monitoring reviews which are driven using a 
risk-based approach to ensure resource is directed to areas of 
potential  material  risk.  The  monitoring  plan  is  approved 
annually by the ARCC. Monitoring reviews are supplemented 
by ongoing staff training and guidance. 

Wherever  possible,  legislative,  and  regulatory  requirements 
are built into relevant administration systems, with appropriate 
monitoring  and  exception  reporting  processes  in  place  to 
monitor compliance. 

The  Group  maintains  a  watching  brief  on  the  regulatory 
environment and, as active members of a number of IOM and 
UK trade bodies, it receives additional regulatory updates and 
guidance  on  proposed  legislative  and  regulatory  issues. 
Upstream  regulatory  changes  are  tracked  and  assessed  for 
impact  by  the  Compliance  Department  and  material  items 
reported to the ARCC. 

Reputation risk 
Reputation  risk  is  the  risk of  loss  resulting  from damages to 
the Group’s reputation, in lost revenue or increased costs, or 
destruction of Shareholder value. 

Controls and mitigation 
The Group mitigates this risk by ensuring that its key risks are 
identified  and  managed,  with  an  impact  assessment  of  any 
potential  or  actual  issues  considering  the  impact  to  the 
Group’s reputation. The Group actively seeks to minimise the 
occurrence of events or issues which could give rise to loss or 
negative  feedback,  and actively  manages  the  impact should 
issues occur.  

Page | 14  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Corporate governance report  
The  Board  is  committed  to  best  practice  in  corporate 
governance.  Directors  have  agreed  to  comply  with  the 
provisions  of  the  Quoted  Companies  Alliance  Corporate 
Governance Code for Small and Mid-Size Quoted Companies 
(“QCA Code”) to the extent which is appropriate to its nature 
and scale of operations. This report illustrates how the Group 
complies with those principles. 

QCA  Principle  1:  Establish  a  strategy  and  business  model 
which promote long-term value for Shareholders 
The immediate strategy and business operations of the Group 
are set out in the Strategic Report. 

The Group’s strategy and business model and amendments 
thereto, are developed by the Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) 
with his senior management team and approved by the Board. 
The  management  team,  led  by  the  CEO,  is  responsible  for 
implementing the strategy and managing the  business at an 
operational level.  

The Group’s overall strategic objective is to grow organically 
and  through  strategic  acquisitions  to  further  augment  the 
range of services it offers and gain market share in markets in 
which it has proven experience. 

The  Group  has  a  balanced  portfolio  of  regulated  and 
unregulated operations, all of which are managed on a  risk-
based  and  prudential  approach.  The  principal  activities 
include: deposit taking; lending to consumer and commercial 
markets  in  the  IOM  and  the  UK;  the  provision  of  dedicated 
financial  advice,  especially  in  the  areas  of  pensions  and 
general 
foreign  currency  and  payment 
services. 

insurance;  and 

The  Group  has  adopted  a  portfolio  approach  to  its  strategic 
assets  and  is  not  dependent  on  one  particular  platform 
technology. The Directors believe that this approach helps to 
mitigate any concentration risk. 

The  Group  operates  in  some heavily  regulated  sectors,  and 
this  is  reflected  in  the  emphasis  on  compliance  and  the 
provision of excellent customer service. 

In  executing  the  Group’s  strategy  and  operational  plans, 
management  will  typically  confront  a  range  of  day-to-day 
challenges  associated  with  risks  and  uncertainties  and  will 
seek to deploy the identified mitigation steps to manage these 
risks as they manifest themselves.  

QCA Principle 2: Seek to understand and meet Shareholder 
needs and expectations 
The Group, via the CEO, seeks to maintain a regular dialogue 
with  both  existing  and  potential  new  Shareholders 
to 
communicate  the  Group’s  strategy  and  to  understand  the 
needs and expectations of Shareholders. 

Beyond  the  Annual  General  Meeting,  the  CEO  and,  where 
appropriate, other members of the senior management team 
will  meet  with  investors  and  analysts  to  provide  them  with 
updates  on  the  Group’s  business  and  to  obtain  feedback 
regarding the market’s expectations of the Group. 

The Group’s investor relations activities encompass dialogue 
with both institutional and private investors. From time to time, 

MFG attends private investor events, providing an opportunity 
for  those  investors  to  meet  with  representatives  from  the 
Group in a more informal setting. 

QCA  Principle  3:  Take  into  account  wider  stakeholder  and 
social  responsibilities  and  their  implications  for  long-term 
success 
The Group is aware of its corporate social responsibilities and 
the need to maintain effective working relationships across a 
range  of  stakeholder  groups.  These  include  not  only  the 
Group’s 
regulatory 
partners, 
authorities, but also customers, be they depositors, borrowers 
or those seeking financial advice. The Group’s operations and 
working  methodologies  take  account  of  the  requirement  to 
balance the needs of all stakeholder groups while maintaining 
focus  on  the  Board’s  primary  responsibility  to  promote  the 
success of the Group for the benefit of its members as a whole. 

employees, 

suppliers, 

  Customers  –  are  at  the  heart  of  the  business,  and  the 
Group operates with a shared vision and set of values. 
These values instil a sense of how all staff form a part of 
the  customer  journey.  Feedback  is  encouraged  at  all 
points of contact; it is proactively enacted upon as it aids 
the identification of process and system enhancements;  

  Shareholders – where appropriate Shareholder feedback 
is discussed at the Board, with any actions agreed being 
tracked  to  completion  by  the  Company  Secretary. 
Shareholders have an opportunity to raise questions to 
the Board, in person, at the Annual General Meeting. In 
addition, 
the  CEO  meets  with  and  addresses 
Shareholder concerns where appropriate; 

  Employees – the Group collates employee feedback on 
an  annual  basis,  engages  employees  via  workshops, 
with  all  outputs  analysed  and  visibly  addressed  by  the 
Executives of the operational subsidiaries that form the 
Group;  with  the  aim  being  to  build  an  engaged, 
committed and enthusiastic workforce;  

  Partners and suppliers – the Executive and Management 
regularly meet with our partners and suppliers to ensure 
the  needs  of  all  parties  are  understood  to  achieve 
continued excellent working relations; and 

  Environment  -  The  Group  recognises  the  QCA  Code 
integration  of  ESG  and 
the 
recommendations  on 
alignment  with  a 
framework  across 
reporting 
organisations.  This  is  a  fast-moving  agenda  with  the 
consolidation  of  voluntary  frameworks  and  growth  of 
international  statutory  reporting  frameworks,  and  the 
Group  continues  to  monitor  this  evolution  and  what  it 
means with interest. Notwithstanding, integration of ESG 
across the Group is on-going as material ESG issues are 
identified.  The  Bank  is  now  into  its  fourth  year  of 
responding  to  ESG  integration  and  provides  the model 
that other Group subsidiaries are following. 

Page | 15  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

QCA  Principle  4:  Embed  effective 
risk  management, 
considering  both  opportunities  and  threats,  throughout  the 
organisation 
The Board is responsible for the systems of risk management 
and internal control and for reviewing their effectiveness by a 
series of committees, overseen  by the ARCC, and reviewed 
by  Internal  Audit.  The  internal  controls  are  designed  to 
manage rather than eliminate risk and provide reasonable but 
not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. 
Through the activities of the ARCC, which meets at least six 
times per year, the effectiveness of these internal controls is 
formally reviewed four times per year. 

A comprehensive budgeting process is completed once a year 
and  is  reviewed  and  approved  by  the  Board.  The  Group’s 
results, and comparison to budget, are reported to the Board 
monthly. 

The Group maintains appropriate insurance cover in respect 
of actions taken against the Directors because of their roles, 
as well as against material loss or claims against the Group. 
The  insured  values  and  type  of  cover  are  comprehensively 
reviewed on at least an annual basis. 

The senior executives meet weekly to consider new risks and 
opportunities 
the  Group,  making 
recommendations to ARCC and / or the Board as appropriate. 

for  presentation 

to 

The  Directors  consider  they  are  provided  with  all  necessary 
information  to assess the Company’s position, performance, 
business model and strategy. 

QCA  Principle  5:  Maintain  the  board  as  a  well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the chair 
The Board currently comprises four Non-executive  Directors 
and four Executive Directors. 

Each of the Directors are subject to election by Shareholders 
at the first Annual General Meeting after their appointment to 
the Board and will continue to seek re-election at least once 
every three years. 

Directors’ biographies are set out on pages 19 and 20. 

The Board is responsible to  the Shareholders for the proper 
management of the Group and meets at least four times a year 
to set the overall direction and strategy of the Group, to review 
operational  and  financial  performance,  and  to  advise  on 
management  appointments.  All  key  operational  and 
investment decisions are subject to Board approval. 

The Board considers itself to be sufficiently independent. The 
QCA  Code  suggests  that  a  board  should  have  at  least  two 
independent  non-executive  directors.  The  Board  considers 
three Non-executive Directors, namely Alan Clarke (Chairman 
of  the  ARCC),  Gregory  Jones  and  John  Spellman,  are 
independent under the QCA Code’s guidance for determining 
such independence. 

Non-executive  Directors  receive  their  fees  in  the  form  of  a 
basic cash emolument. The CEO and Finance Director are the 
only  Directors  who  hold  Restricted  Stock  Units  (“RSUs”)  or 
options over the Group’s shares. The number and terms are 
found on page 27. 

The  RSUs  or  option  grant  concerned  are  not  deemed  to  be 
significant,  either  for  the  individual  Executive  Director  or  in 
aggregate. The current remuneration structure for the Board’s 
Non-executive Directors is deemed to be proportionate. 

QCA Principle 6: Ensure that between them the directors have 
the necessary up-to-date experience, skills and capabilities 
The Board considers that all the Non-executive Directors are 
of  sufficient  competence  and  calibre  to  add  strength  and 
objectivity to its activities, and bring considerable experience 
in regulatory, financial and operational development within the 
financial service sector in both the IOM and the UK. 

The Directors’ biographies are set out on pages 19 and 20. 

The Board regularly reviews the composition of the Board to 
ensure that it has the necessary breadth and depth of skills to 
support the ongoing development of the Group. 

The  Chairman,  in  conjunction  with  the  Company  Secretary, 
ensures that the Directors’ knowledge is kept up to date on key 
its 
issues  and  developments  pertaining 
operational environment and to the Directors’ responsibilities 
as members of the Board. During the year, Directors receive 
updates  from  the  Company  Secretary  and  various  external 
advisers on a number of corporate governance matters. 

to  the  Group, 

Directors’  service  contracts  or  appointment  letters  make 
provision for a Director to seek personal advice in furtherance 
of  his  or  her  duties  and  responsibilities,  normally  via  the 
Company Secretary. 

QCA Principle 7: Evaluate board performance based on clear 
and relevant objectives, seeking continuous improvement 
The  Board  has  an  internal  process  for  evaluation  of  its  own 
performance, that of its committees and individual Directors, 
including  the  Chairman.  This  process  is  conducted  annually 
and  last  took  place  in  November  2022,  with  no  substantive 
issues arising.  

The  Board  may  utilise  the  results  of  the  evaluation  process 
when  considering  the  adequacy  of  the  composition  of  the 
Board and for succession planning. 

QCA Principle 8: Promote a corporate culture that is based on 
ethical values and behaviours 
The Board seeks to maintain the highest standards of integrity 
and probity  in  the conduct of  the  Group’s  operations.  These 
values  are  enshrined  in  the  written  policies  and  working 
practices  adopted  by  all  employees  in  the  Group.  An  open 
the  Group,  with  regular 
culture 
communications to staff regarding progress and staff feedback 
sought. The senior management team seeks to address any 
concerns  that  may  arise,  escalating  these  to  Board  level  as 
necessary. 

is  encouraged  within 

The Group is committed to providing a safe environment for its 
staff and all other parties for which the Group has a legal or 
moral  responsibility  in  this  area.  This  is  enshrined  in  the 
Group’s health and safety policy. 

Page | 16  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

QCA  Principle  9:  Maintain  governance  structures  and 
processes that are fit for purpose and support good decision- 
making by the board 

The  Board  has  established  an  ARCC,  a  Remuneration 
Committee  and  a  Nomination  Committee  with  formally 
delegated duties and responsibilities.  

The role of the Board  
The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success 
of  the  organisation.  Its  principal  function  is  to  determine  the 
strategy and policies of the Group within an effective control 
framework which enables risk to be assessed and managed. 
The Governance Framework is reviewed to ensure it remains 
fit  for  purpose  on  an  annual  basis  and  is  approved  by  the 
Board. 

The  Board  ensures  that  the  necessary  financial  and  human 
resources are in place for the Group to meet its objectives and 
that  business  and  management  performances  are  reviewed. 
Furthermore, the Board ensures that the Group operates within 
its  constitution,  relevant  legislation  and  regulation  and  that 
proper accounting records and effective systems of business 
control are established, maintained, documented, and audited.  

There are  at least four formal Board meetings each year. All 
Board members have the benefit, at the Group’s expense, of 
liability  insurance  in  respect  of  their  responsibilities  as 
Directors  and  have  access  to  independent  legal  or  other 
professional  advice  if  required.  The  Board  has  a  formal 
schedule of matters which are reserved  for its consideration, 
and  it  has  established  three  committees  to  consider  specific 
issues  in  greater  detail,  being  the  ARCC,  the  Remuneration 
Committee  and  the  Nomination  Committee.  The  Terms  of 
Reference for each of these Committees are published on the 
Group’s website www.mfg.im.  

There is a clear separation of the roles of CEO and Executive 
Chairman. 

Chairman  
The Chairman is responsible for leading the  Board, ensuring 
its effectiveness in all aspects of its role, promoting a culture of 
openness  of  debate,  and  communicating  with  the  Group’s 
members  on  behalf  of  the  Board.  The  Chairman  sets  the 
direction of the Board by facilitating the effective contribution of 
Non-executive  Directors  and  ensuring  constructive  relations 
between  Executive  and  Non-executive  Directors.  The 
Chairman also ensures that Directors receive accurate, timely 
and  clear  information.  This  fosters  a  positive  corporate 
governance culture throughout the Group.  

CEO 
The  CEO  is  responsible  for  managing  the  Group’s  business 
and operations within the parameters set by the Board.  

Non-executive Directors  
The  Non-executive  Directors  are  responsible  for  bringing 
independent judgement to the discussions held by the Board, 
using  their  breadth  of  experience,  and  understanding  of  the 
business.  Their  key  responsibilities  are  to  constructively 
challenge and contribute to strategic proposals, and to monitor 
performance, 
resources,  and  standards  of  conduct, 
compliance, and control, whilst providing support to executive 
management in developing the Group. 

Prior to appointment, Non-executive Directors are required to 
demonstrate  that  they  are  able  to  allocate  sufficient  time  to 
undertake their duties. 

Group Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee (“ARCC”) 
The ARCC meets at least six times each year and comprises 
of three Independent Non-executive Directors, currently Alan 
Clarke  (Chairman),  Gregory  Jones  and  John  Spellman. 
Representatives from Compliance and Risk, the Internal and 
External  Auditor  and  executive  management  attend  by 
invitation. Its role is to be responsible for reviewing the integrity 
of  the  financial  statements  and  the  balance  of  information 
disclosed in the accompanying Directors’ Report, to review the 
effectiveness  of  internal  controls  and  risk  management 
systems,  to  monitor  and  review  the  effectiveness  of  the 
Internal Audit function and to consider and recommend to the 
Board (for approval by the members) the appointment or re-
appointment of the External Auditor. The ARCC reviews and 
monitors  the  External  Auditor’s  objectivity,  competence, 
effectiveness,  and  independence,  ensuring  that  if  it  or  its 
associates are invited to undertake non-audit work it will not 
compromise auditor objectivity and independence. 

Group Remuneration Committee (“REMCO”) 
The  REMCO  meets  at  least  twice  a  year  and  currently  
comprises  of  two  Independent  Non-executive  Directors, 
currently Alan Clarke (Chairman), and Gregory Jones, with the 
Executive Directors, Head of Human Resources and external 
advisers  attending  by  invitation  where  appropriate.  It  is 
responsible,  amongst  other  matters,  for  determining  the 
remuneration  of  the  Executive  Directors,  the  Company 
Secretary,  and  other  members  of  management.  Committee 
members do not take part in discussions concerning their own 
remuneration.  The  Chairman  and  CEO  determine  Non-
executive Director fees. 

Group Nomination Committee (“NOMCO”) 
The NOMCO is comprised of the whole Board. It is chaired by 
the  Chairman  of  the  Board  and  is  responsible  for  making 
recommendations  to  the  Board  on  matters  relating  to  the 
composition  of  the  Board,  including  Executive  and  Non-
executive  Director  succession  planning,  the  appointment  of 
new Directors and re-election of existing Directors. 

Appointments to the Board  
The  principal  purpose  of  the  Nomination  Committee  is  to 
undertake the assessment of the balance of skills, experience, 
independence  and  knowledge  on  the  Board  and  subsidiary 
boards against the requirements of the business, with a view 
to determining whether any shortages exist. Having completed 
the  assessment,  the  Committee  makes  recommendations  to 
the  Board  accordingly.  Appointments  to  the  Board  are made 
on merit, with due regard to the benefits of diversity. Within this 
context,  the  paramount  objective  is  the  selection  of  the  best 
candidate, irrespective of background, and it is the view of the 
Board that establishing quotas or targets for the diversity of the 
Board is not appropriate.  

All  Group  Director  appointments  must  be  approved  by  the 
Company’s  Nominated  Adviser,  as  required  under  the  AIM 
Rules, before they are appointed to the Group Board.  

Page | 17  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Re-election  
The Group’s Rules require that all Directors are submitted for 
election  at  the  AGM  following  their  first  appointment  to  the 
Board and one third of the Directors are subject to retirement 
by  rotation  on  an  annual  basis  to  refresh  the  Board, 
irrespective of performance. 

The Corporate Governance Manual also contains a schedule 
of matters specifically reserved for Board decision or approval 
and sets out the Company’s share dealing code and its public 
interest disclosure (“whistle-blowing”) policy and procedures. 

Board and committee attendance 
The  number  of  formal  scheduled  Board  and  Committee 
meetings held and attended by Directors during the year was 
as follows:  

Jim Mellon * 
Denham Eke 
Douglas Grant 
James Smeed 
Gregory Bailey* 
Alan Clarke 
David Gibson ^ 
Gregory Jones  
John Spellman 

Board  ARCC  REMCO  NOMCO 
3/4 
4/4 
4/4 
4/4 
4/4 
4/4 
1/1 
4/4 
4/4 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
18/18 
5/5 
13/13 
- 

5/8 
8/8 
8/8 
7/8 
3/8 
5/8 
2/2 
6/8 
8/8 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
8/8 
2/2 
7/8 
8/8 

^ David Gibson retired on 25 May 2022 
* Jim Mellon and Gregory Bailey recused themselves from two 
Board meetings held where they held a conflict of interest 

QCA  Principle  10:  Communicate  how  the  company  is 
governed  and  is  performing  by  maintaining  a  dialogue  with 
Shareholders and other relevant stakeholders 
The Group places a high priority on regular communications 
with its various stakeholder groups and aims to ensure that all 
communications  concerning  the  Group’s  activities  are  clear, 
fair, and accurate. The Group’s website is regularly updated, 
and users can register to be alerted when announcements or 
details  of  presentations  and  events  are  posted  onto  the 
website. 

Notices of General Meetings of the Company can be found on: 
https://www.mfg.im/investor-centre/regulatory-news. 

The  results  of  voting  on  all  resolutions  in  future  general 
meetings will be posted to the Group’s website, including any 
actions  to  be  taken  because  of  resolutions  for  which  votes 
against  have  been  received  from  at  least  20  per  cent  of 
independent Shareholders. 

Approval  
This report was approved by the Board on    March 2023 and 
signed on its behalf by: 

Jim Mellon  
Executive Chairman  
20 March 2023 

Page | 18  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Executive Directors 

Denham Eke (71) ‡ 
Executive Vice Chairman 
Denham Eke is the Managing Director of Burnbrae 
international  asset 
Group  Limited,  a  private 
management  company.  He  began  his  career  in 
stockbroking  with  Sheppards  &  Chase  before 
moving into corporate planning for Hogg Robinson 
plc, a major multinational insurance broker. He is a 
director of many years standing of both public and 
financial 
private  companies 
services,  property,  mining,  and  manufacturing 
sectors.  

involved 

the 

in 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 2 November 2007 and 
Executive Vice Chairman on 3 November 2021.   

Jim Mellon (66)‡ 
Executive Chairman 
Jim  Mellon 
is  a  well-known  and  successful 
entrepreneur,  author  and  economic  commentator, 
starting  his  career  in  fund  management  and  now 
includes  biopharma,  property,  mining  and 
information 
technology  amongst  his  many 
investments. He holds directorships in a number of 
companies,  both  quoted  and  unquoted,  including 
the  chairmanship  of  Juvenescence  Limited  and 
being an executive director of Agronomics Limited. 
He, together with Burnbrae Group Limited, of which 
he 
the  beneficial  owner,  hold  a  18.83% 
shareholding  of Manx Financial Group  PLC. He is 
the founder, principal shareholder and chairman of 
the  Endurance  RP  Limited,  quoted  on  the  Hong 
Kong Stock Exchange. 

is 

Appointment 
Appointed  to  the  Board  on  2  November  2007  and 
Executive Chairman on 12 February 2009. 

 James Smeed (38) ‡ 
Group Finance Director 
James Smeed has over 15 years’ financial services 
experience, having started his career with KPMG in 
audit  and  assisting  in  transaction  services.  He 
joined the Group in August 2012 as Group Head of 
Finance and was appointed to the Bank’s Board as 
Finance  Director  in  2017.  He  is  both  a  Chartered 
Accountant  and  a  Chartered  Tax  Adviser  and 
Treasurer of the Isle of Man Bankers Association. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board as Group Finance Director 
on 3 November 2021. 

Douglas Grant (58) ‡ 
Chief Executive Officer 
Douglas  Grant  has  over  40  years’  experience 
working in finance, initially with Scottish Power, 
before  moving  to  the  industrial  sector  to  work 
with  ICI  and  then  Allenwest.  Prior  to  joining 
Manx  Financial  Group  PLC,  he  was  finance 
director  of  various  UK  and  Isle  of  Man  private 
sector  companies  and  has  extensive  capital 
markets  experience.  He  is  a  professionally 
qualified banker with an executive MBA. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 14 January 2010 and 
Chief Executive Officer on 3 November 2021.  

Page | 19  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Non-executive Directors 

 Alan Clarke (72)‡†*   
Independent Non-executive Director 
Alan  Clarke  is  a  chartered  accountant  and  former 
senior partner of Ernst & Young during which time 
he worked closely with HSBC offshore operations in 
both  the  Channel  Islands  and  the  Isle  of  Man. 
Currently,  he  specialises  in  corporate  finance  and 
strategic    consultancy,  advising  a  variety  of  both 
listed and private companies. He holds several non-
executive  directorships  and  is  a  past  President  of 
ICAEW Manchester. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 2 November 2007. He is 
Chairman  of  the  Audit,  Risk  and  Compliance 
Committee  and  Chairman  of  the  Remuneration 
Committee.  

Gregory Bailey (67) ‡ 
Non-executive Director 
Gregory Bailey, founded Palantir Group Inc which 
made successful investments in bio-tech company 
start-ups  and  financings,  and  is  currently  CEO  of 
Juvenescence  Ltd,  chairman  of  Portage  Biotech 
Inc, a CSE-traded drug development company and 
non-executive  director  of  NYSE  traded  Biohaven 
Pharmaceuticals  Holding  Company.    He  is  also 
founder  and  chairman  of  Chelsea  Avondale,  a 
property and causualty insurance and reinsurance 
group.  Along  with  comprehensive  experience  in 
finance  and  healthcare,  he  has  served  on  many 
public company boards and brings to the Group an 
extensive involvement in corporate governance.  

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 7 February 2018. 

John Spellman (56) ‡*  
Independent Non-executive Director 
John  Spellman  is  both  a  qualified  accountant 
and  banker.  He  spent  his  early  years  in 
banking,  fund  management  and  accountancy, 
specialising in the various parts of the offshore 
industry  before  being  appointed  managing 
director  of  Clerical  Medical  Offshore.  He 
transferred to the UK as chief operating officer 
within  Clerical  Medical  Financial  Services 
before  being  appointed  managing  director  of 
HBoS Financial Services. He has worked with 
and created a number of successful businesses 
and  has  wide  experience 
liaising  with 
government regulators.  He has held approved 
status with the Isle of Man FSA in various roles 
and has acted as strategic advisor to the Isle of 
Man  government,  specialising  in  finance  and 
foreign direct investment for over 11 years.  

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board  on  4 May  2020.  He is 
Chairman of Conister Bank Limited. 

Gregory Jones (64) ‡†*   
Independent Non-executive Director 
Gregory Jones was called to the UK Bar in 1982 and 
subsequently  joined  KPMG  Isle  of  Man  where  he 
spent  29  years  before  retiring  in  October  2019  as 
Head of Tax. He currently provides tax advice for a 
leading Isle of Man based firm of advocates and is 
a director of a local Corporate Service Provider. He 
is a member of the Chartered Institute of Taxation. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board 3 November 2021. 

  Legend 

*   Member of the Audit, Risk and Compliance 

Committee 

†  Member of the Remuneration Committee 
‡  Member of the Nominations Committee 

Page | 20  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Company Secretary    

Lesley Crossley (55) 
Company Secretary 

Lesley  Crossley  is  a  Fellow  of  The  Chartered 
Institute  of  Secretaries  and  Administrators  and  an 
Associate  of  the  Chartered  Insurance  Institute.  
Lesley  has  over  30  years  of  wide-ranging 
experience in the financial services industry both in 
the UK and the Isle of Man and has held the position 
of Company Secretary with a number of Isle of Man 
and international companies. 

Appointment 
Re-appointed  as  the  Company  Secretary  on  2 
September  2019  after  re-joining  the  Group.  She 
also held the position from September 2009 to June 
2018. 

Advisers 

Registered Office 
Clarendon House 
Victoria Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 2LN 

Registered Agent 
CW Corporate Services Limited 
Bank Chambers 
15-19 Athol Street  
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LB 

Legal Advisers 
As to Isle of Man law 
Long & Co Limited 
Eyreton 
Quarterbridge Road 
Douglas 
IM2 3RF 

As to English law 
Hill Dickinson LLP 
The Broadgate Tower 
20 Primrose Street 
London EC21 2EW 

Independent Auditor 
KPMG Audit LLC 
Heritage Court 
41 Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LA 

Principal Banker 
National Westminster Bank plc 
250 Bishopsgate 
London EC2M 4AA 

Consulting Actuaries 
Boal & Co Ltd 
Marquis House 
Isle of Man Business Park 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM2 2QZ 

Nominated Advisor  
and Broker 
Beaumont Cornish  
Building 3 
Chiswick Park 
566 Chiswick High Road 
London W4 5YA 

Registrar 
Computershare Investor  
Services (Jersey) Limited 
13 Castle Street 
St Helier 
Jersey JE1 1ES 

Presentation  of  Annual  Report  and 
Accounts 
Presented here are the Annual Report and 
Accounts of Manx Financial Group PLC. 

Company Information 
The Annual and Interim Reports, along with 
other supplementary information of interest 
to  Shareholders,  are 
its
website.  The  address  of  the  website  is 
investor 
www.mfg.im  which 
relations information and contact details. 

included  on 

includes 

Page | 21  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

Dear Shareholders 
I am pleased to set out below an account of the ARCC’s role 
and activities during 2022 and up to the date of publication of 
this Annual Report.  

Due  to  its  adoption  of  the  QCA  Corporate  Governance 
standard,  the  Committee  reassessed  the  adequacy  of  its 
terms  of  reference  and  its  function  bearing  in  mind  the 
requirements of this standard. 

the  Nomination  Committee, 

Membership 
Members  of  the  ARCC  are  appointed  by  the  Board,  on  the 
recommendation  of 
in 
consultation  with  the  Chairman  of  the  Committee.  The 
Committee  shall  be  made  up  of  at  least  2  members.  All 
members of the Committee shall be Non-executive Directors 
and  at  least  one  of  whom  shall  have  recent  and  relevant 
financial experience with a professional qualification from one 
of the professional accountancy bodies. The Chairman of the 
Board shall not be a member of the Committee.  

Appointments to the Committee shall be for a period of up to 
3-years,  which  may  be  extended  by  the  Board  for  a  further       
3-year  period  (or,  in  exceptional  circumstances,  two  further     
3-year  periods),  provided  the  Director  remains  independent.  
The  Board  may  approve  annual  extensions  to  any  Director 
who has served 3 consecutive terms. 

The Board shall appoint the Chairman of the Committee who 
shall  be  a  Non-executive  Director.  In  the  absence  of  the 
Chairman of the Committee and / or an appointed deputy, the 
remaining members present shall elect one of themselves to 
chair the meeting. 

The Committee shall meet at least six times a year.  Of these, 
two  will  be  held  to  review  the  annual  and  interim  financial 
statements.  Outside  of  the  formal  meeting  programme,  the 
Chairman of the Committee will maintain a dialogue with key 
individuals involved in the Company’s governance. 

Members 

Appointed  

Alan Clarke (Chairman)  2 February 2007 
David Gibson* 
Gregory Jones 
John Spellman 

13 February 2009 
3 November 2021 
4 May 2020 

*David Gibson retired on 25 May 2022 

Number of 
meetings 
attended 
8/8 
2/2 
7/8 
8/8 

Only  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to  attend 
Committee  meetings.  However  other  individuals  may  be 
invited by the Chairman of the Committee to attend all or part 
of any meeting as and when appropriate.  

The ARCC holds separate meetings with Internal Audit, Risk 
and Compliance and our External Auditor, KPMG Audit LLC. 

The  Chairman  of  the  Board,  the  Executive  Directors  and  
management may be invited to meetings of the ARCC but are 
excluded from the separate meetings held between the ARCC 
and the External Auditor. 

Execution of functions 
The ARCC has executed its duties and responsibilities during 
the year in accordance with its terms of reference as it relates 
to auditor independence, assisting the Board in its evaluation 
of  its  control  environment  and  internal  controls  including 
information systems and accounting practices. 

During  the  year  under  review,  the  Committee  considered 
among other matters, the following: 

Financial reporting and annual financial statements: 

  Considered the annual financial statements with the 
External  Auditor,  Executive  Directors 
and 
management  and  reviewed  the  appropriateness  of 
significant  judgements,  estimates  and  accounting 
policies; 

  Reviewed  and  recommended  to  the  Board  for 

adoption: 

o  Unaudited condensed interim results for the 

period-ended 30 June 2022; 
o  The Bank’s ICAAP for 2022; 
o  Audited  MFG  PLC  Group  and  subsidiary 
annual  financial  statements  for  the  year-
ended 31 December 2022; and 
  Discussed  any  significant  and  unusual  accounting 
matters including key audit matters identified by the 
External Auditor. 

External audit: 

  Monitored  and  assessed  the  independence  of  the 
External  Auditor  based  on  reports  received  and 
inquiries made into work performed; 

  Determined  the  nature  and  extent  of  non-audit 

services performed by the External Auditor; 

  Reviewed  and  assessed  the  significance  of  non-

audit fees compared to audit fees; 

  Reviewed  and  agreed  the  external  audit  plan  in 
advance  for  the  year-end  audit  which  set  out  the 
scope of audit, significant risks, areas of audit focus 
and audit timetable; 
Tendering  process  as  part  of  the  external  audit 
process; 

 

  Received a presentation from the External Auditor on 
the  findings  from  their  execution  of  the  audit  plan; 
and 
  Satisfied 

the  experience  and 

itself  as 

to 

independence of the engagement partner. 

Internal audit: 

  Reviewed and approved the Internal Audit plan; 
  Reviewed  Internal  Audit’s  findings  including  the 
design  and  operating  effectiveness  of  the  internal 
control environment and control activities; and  
  Reviewed Internal Audit’s findings on the adequacy 

and reliability of management information. 

Risk and compliance: 

  Assessed  the  effectiveness  of  the  Group  Risk  and 

Compliance function; 

  Reviewed 

the  Group  Risk  and  Compliance 
department  findings  on  the  effectiveness  of  the 
Group’s regulatory controls; 

  Recommended  a 

revision  of 

the  Risk  and 

Compliance policies for Board approval; and 

  Recommended  a  revision  of  the  Internal  Capital 
Adequacy Assessment Process for Board approval. 

Page | 22  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

External Auditor’s independence  
KPMG Audit LLC has been the Group’s external auditor since 
2007. 

Consideration was given to the non-audit work performed by 
the External Auditor. The ratio of non-audit fees to audit fees 
for the year was 0.04 to 1 (2021: 0.01 to 1). Non-audit services 
related to tax advisory services. Services were performed by 
a  separate  team  to  the  audit  team  to  safeguard  against  the 
self-review threat to independence. 

The ARCC obtained assurance from the External Auditor that 
internal  governance  processes  within  KPMG  Audit  LLC 
support  and  demonstrate  its  claim  of  independence.  This 

Key accounting matter 
Loan  impairment  –  wholesale  funding  and  individual  finance 
agreements 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting  framework  to 
calculate  impairment  using  the  expected  credit  loss  model. 
Impairment is measured on an  instrument-by-instrument basis 
except  where  instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured on a collective basis under the expected credit loss 
model.  

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the amount and 
timing  of  future  recoveries  which  require  an  assessment  of 
matters  such  as  future  economic  conditions  and  the  value  of 
collateral. Estimates, by their nature, give rise to a higher risk of 
material misstatement due to error or fraud.  

The  effect  of  these  matters  is  that,  as  part  of  the  External 
Auditor’s risk assessment, they determined that the impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation  uncertainty,  with  a 
potential  range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  their 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole, and possibly 
many times that amount. 
Impairment of goodwill and intangible assets 
Goodwill and intangible assets are significant and the estimated 
recoverable amount of these balances is subjective due to the 
inherent  uncertainty  involved  in  forecasting  and  discounting 
future  cash  flows  for  the  goodwill  impairment  test  and  in 
performing  a  review  for  indicators  of  impairment  for  intangible 
assets. 

The  effect  of  these  matters  is  that,  as  part  of  the  External 
Auditor’s risk assessment, they have determined that the value 
in use of goodwill has a high degree of estimation uncertainty, 
with a potential range of reasonable outcomes greater than their 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 

assurance  was  provided  through  the  receipt  of  an  ISA  (UK) 
260 letter. 

The ARCC is satisfied with the independence of KPMG Audit 
LLC  and 
is  recommending  that  KPMG  Audit  LLC  be 
reappointed  as  the  Group’s  auditor  at  the  2023  Annual 
General Meeting. 

Key accounting matters 
The  ARCC  considered  key  accounting  matters  in  relation  to 
the Group’s financial statements and disclosures. The primary 
areas  in  relation  to  2022  and  how  they  were  addressed  are 
detailed below: 

ARCC response 
The ARCC satisfied itself that the internal control environment 
and  control  activities  are  appropriately  designed  and 
implemented.  This  was  supported  by  review  of  Internal  and 
External Audit reports and findings. 

the 
The  ARCC  reviewed  reports 
continued implementation of IFRS 9 and key changes to internal 
processes  and  controls.  The  ARCC  reviewed 
the  key 
assumptions used by management such as Loss Given Default, 
Loss Rates, Probability of Default on a quarterly basis. 

from  management  on 

The ARCC satisfied itself that the internal control environment 
and  control  activities  are  appropriately  designed  and 
implemented.  This  was  supported  by  review  of  Internal  and 
External Audit reports and findings. 

The  ARCC  reviewed  management’s  assessment  of  Goodwill 
and  Intangible  Asset  impairment  and  concluded  that  the 
recoverable amount is appropriate after the impairment of EAL 
Goodwill (See note 34). 

Page | 23  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

ARCC response 
The ARCC is satisfied that the going concern assessment over 
the Group provides sufficient assurance over the recoverability 
of  the  Company’s  subordinated  loans  and  investment  in 
subsidiaries. 

Key accounting matter 
Carrying  value  of  Company’s  subordinated 
investment in subsidiaries 
The carrying value of the Company’s subordinated loans to and 
investment in subsidiaries represents 94% (2021: 97%) of the 
Parent Company’s total assets.  

loans  and 

The  assessment  of  carrying  value  is  not  at  a  high  risk  of 
significant misstatement or subject to significant judgement as 
the carrying value is supported by the audited net asset value 
of the subsidiaries. 

However,  due  to  its  materiality  in  the  context  of  the  MFG 
financial statements, the External Auditor considered this to be 
the  area  that  had  the  greatest  effect  on  their  audit  of  the 
Company. 

The ARCC has complied with and discharged its responsibilities as set out in its Terms of Reference. 

Alan Clarke 
Chairman 
20 March 2023 

Page | 24  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT 

Dear Shareholders 
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2022. 

Membership 
Members  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  (“REMCO”)  are 
appointed  by  the  Board,  on  the  recommendation  of  the 
Nomination  Committee  in  consultation  with  the  Chairman  of 
the Committee. The Committee shall be made up of at least 2 
members.  All  members  of  the  Committee  shall  be  Non-
executive Directors. The Chairman of the Board shall not be a 
member of the Committee. 

Appointments to the Committee shall be for a period of up to 
3-years,  which  may  be  extended  by  the  Board  for  a  further       
3-year  period  (or,  in  exceptional  circumstances,  two  further      
3-year  periods),  provided  the  Director  remains  independent.  
The  Board  may  approve  annual  extensions  to  any  Director 
who has served 3 consecutive terms. 

The Board shall appoint the Chairman of the Committee who 
shall  be  a  Non-executive  Director.  In  the  absence  of  the 
Chairman of the Committee and / or an appointed deputy, the 
remaining members present shall elect one of themselves to 
chair the meeting. 

The Committee shall meet at least twice a year and  at  such 
other times as the Chairman of the Committee shall require. 

 

the  Group  is  able  to  attract,  develop  and  retain  high-
performing  and  motivated  employees  in  the  competitive 
local IOM and wider UK markets; 

  employees  are  offered  a  competitive  remuneration 
package to encourage enhanced performance and are, in 
a fair and responsible manner, rewarded for their individual 
contribution to the success of the Group; 
it reflects the Group’s culture and values; and  
there  is  full  transparency  of  the  Group’s  Remuneration 
Policy. 

 
 

In line with the Board’s approach, which reflects that adopted 
within  other  comparable  organisations, 
the  Group’s 
Remuneration  Policy  provides  for  the  reward  of  Executive 
Directors through salaries and other benefits.  

Executive Directors’ Emoluments 
The  remuneration  for  Executive  Directors  reflects  their 
responsibilities. 
It  comprises  basic  salary,  performance 
related  bonus  when  this  is  considered  appropriate,  and 
various benefits detailed below.  

As with staff generally, whose salaries are subject to annual 
reviews,  basic  salaries  payable  to  Executive  Directors  are 
reviewed  each  year  with  reference  to  jobs  carrying  similar 
responsibilities in comparable financial organisations, market 
conditions generally and local employment competition in view 
of the Group’s geographical position.  

Number of 
meetings 
attended 
18/18 
5/5 
13/13 

The  Group  operates  a  non-contractual  discretionary  annual 
performance  related  pay  scheme  based  on  the  trading 
performance  of  the  Group  and  the  individual  employee’s 
performance  assessed  for  the  period  under  review  in  a 
manner which promotes sound risk management and does not 
promote excessive risk taking.   

Membership 

Appointed 

Alan Clarke (Chairman)  13 February 2009 
David Gibson* 
Greg Jones 

12 December 2010 
25 May 2022 

*David Gibson retired on 25 May 2022 

Only  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to  attend 
Committee  meetings.  However,  other  individuals  may  be 
invited by the Chairman of the Committee to attend all or part 
of any meeting as and when appropriate. 

Areas of focus for 2022 
During the year, the Committee considered the following: 

  Reviewed the overall pay of Executive Directors; 
  Reviewed 

the  non-contractual  discretionary  annual 

performance related pay scheme for Group staff;  

  Reviewed and approved the provision of RSUs to Group 

staff; 

  Reviewed and approved all new Group staff appointments 
where  gross  basic  salary  exceeded  £75,000  (increased 
from £50,000 in May 2022); and 

  Reviewed  and  approved  all  changes  to  terms  and 
conditions  of  staff  where  gross  basic  salary  exceeded 
£75,000 (increased from £50,000 in May 2022). 

Remuneration policy 
The  Group’s  Remuneration  Policy  reflects  the  Group’s 
business  strategy  and  objectives  as  well  as  sustained  and 
long-term  value  creation  for  Shareholders.    In  addition,  the 
policy  aims  to  be  fair  and  provide  equality  of  opportunity, 
ensuring that:  

The non-contractual discretionary annual performance related 
pay scheme may be paid in one year but that does not confer 
any entitlement in future years.  

Performance  assessments  are  conducted  annually 
to 
the  performance  rating  of  each  employee’s 
determine 
achievements against a mix of targets set and agreed at the 
beginning  of  each  year  between  the  employee  and  their 
manager.  No incentives are paid to employees or executives 
where  the  performance  rating  reflects  below  an  agreed 
expected level for the role employed. 

The non-contractual discretionary annual performance related 
pay  scheme  may  be  disbursed  as  a  cash  payment  through 
payroll,  share  based  instruments  including  RSUs  and  /  or 
options.  An element of deferment to align the interests of the 
employee  to  the  longer term performance of the Group may 
also be included. 

EAL’s  Financial  Advisors  are  salaried  and  commission  is 
calculated  on  a  pre-agreed  percentage  over  target  which  is 
typically  set  at  between  2  to  3  times  annual  gross  salary 
depending  on the  size  of  the Financial  Advisor’s client  base 
and their historical performance.  Each Financial Advisor is set 
objectives at the beginning of the year including a 100% pass 
in  all  compliance 
indemnified 
commission is paid and the underlying client policy lapses and 
the  commission  is  clawed  back  then  this  is  reviewed  by  an 

requirements.  Where 

Page | 25  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT 

Executive  Director  in  order  to  monitor  trends  and  is  then 
clawed back from the relevant Financial Advisor. 

Where 
the  Group  operates  contractually  guaranteed 
performance related pay, the contractual conditions must be 
approved by the REMCO.  

Executive Directors’ contractual terms 
In keeping with current recommended practice, the standard 
term  for  Executive  Director  appointments,  which  have  a 
contractual notice period, is 6 months.  

Non-executive Directors’ remuneration 
Non-executive Directors do not receive any benefits other than 
their  fees  and  travelling  expenses  for  which  they  are 
reimbursed.  The  level  of  fees  payable  to  Non-executive 
Directors  is  assessed  using  benchmarks  from  a  group  of 
comparable financial organisations.  

Directors’ emoluments 

Remuneration 
/  Fees 
£ 

Performance 
Related Pay 
£ 

Executives 
Jim Mellon 
Denham Eke 
Douglas Grant 
James Smeed 

Non-executives 
Gregory Bailey 
Alan Clarke 
David Gibson ^ 
Gregory Jones  
John Spellman 

Aggregate 
emoluments 

50,000 
60,000 
252,175 
154,375 
516,550 

25,000 
45,000 
35,417 
25,000 
76,675 
207,092 

- 
- 
50,000 
18,000 
68,000 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

The procedure for determining Director remuneration 
The  REMCO,  comprising  two  Non-executive  Directors,  is 
responsible  for  setting  the  remuneration  of  the  Executive 
Directors. Committee members do not take part in discussions 
concerning their own remuneration. The basic Non-executive 
Director  fee  is  set  by  the  Group  Chairman  and  CEO.  The 
Chairman  of  the  Committee  reports  at  the  Board  meeting 
following a committee meeting. 

Implementation report 
It  is  the  view  of  the  Committee  that  Directors’  remuneration 
awarded  across  the  Group  for  the  year  has  been  in 
accordance with the Group’s stated Remuneration Policy and, 
on behalf of the Committee I recommend that you endorse this 
Group  report.  An  analysis  of  Directors’  emoluments  is  as 
follows: 

Pension 
£ 

- 
- 
25,218 
15,438 
40,656 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

2022 
Total 
£ 

50,000 
60,000 
327,393 
187,813 
625,206 

25,000 
45,000 
35,417 
25,000 
76,675 
207,092 

2021 
Total 
£ 

50,000 
50,000 
281,378 
143,992 
525,370 

- 
45,000 
85,000 
5,949 
40,000 
175,949 

723,642 

68,000 

40,656 

832,298 

701,319 

^ David Gibson retired from the Board on 25 May 2022. 

Approval 
This report was approved by the Board of Directors on 20 March  2023 and signed on its behalf by:   

Alan Clarke 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
20 March 2023 

Page | 26  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT 

The  Directors  present  their  annual  report  and  the  audited 
financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2022. 

Principal regulated activities 
The principal activities of the Group are the provision of asset 
and  personal  finance,  investing  activities,  foreign  exchange 
brokerage services and wealth management. 

Investors  Services 

Interactive 
Nominees Limited 
Rock (Nominees) Limited 
Chase Nominees Limited 

Number 

4,216,456 

4,198,716 
3,483,526 

% of 
issued capital 

3.66 

3.65 
3.03 

The Bank, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, holds a 
Class 1(1) deposit taking licence issued under Part 2 of the Isle 
of  Man  Financial  Services  Act  2008.  Deposits  made  with  the 
Bank are covered by the Isle of Man Depositors’ Compensation 
Scheme contained in the Banking Business (Compensation of 
Depositors) Regulations 1991.  

The  Bank  and  CFL  are  authorised  by  the  FCA  to  conduct 
brokerage services. 

EAL is authorised by the FSA under section 7 of the Financial 
Services Act 2008 to conduct investment business as a Class 
2, sub-classes (3), (6) and (7) licence holder.  

Results and dividends 
The Group profit before tax for the year was £5,211,000 (2021: 
£3,043,000). 

On 25 May 2022, MFG declared a dividend of £279,200 (2021: 
£196,800)  which  could  either  be  taken  up  in  cash  or  new 
ordinary  shares.  781,349  new  shares  (2021:  161,562  new 
shares)  were  admitted  to  the  Alternative  Investment  Market 
(“AIM”)  at  8.0205  pence  per  share  (2021:  7.0575  pence  per 
share), at a total cost of £62,000 (2021: £12,000).  

The proposed transfers to and from reserves are as set out in 
the Statement of Changes in Equity on page 41.  

Going Concern 
The Group has recognised a profit for the year after taxation of 
£4,674,000  (2021:  £2,809,000).  As  at  the  year  ended  31 
December  2022,  the  Bank  had  a  total  capital  ratio  of  15.3% 
(2021:  19.1%)  which  exceeded  the  regulatory  minimum 
requirement of 14.0% (2021: 14.0%). Based on these factors, 
management has a reasonable expectation that the Group has 
and  will  continue  to  have  adequate  resources  to  continue  in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future. 

Accordingly, the Directors continue to adopt the going concern 
basis in preparing the financial statements. 

Share capital 
The authorised and issued share capital of the Company are set 
out in note 29 to the financial statements.  

Significant shareholdings 
The number of shares held and the percentage of the issued 
shares which that number represented as of 17 March 2023 are: 

Directors and Directors’ share interests 

The number of shares held by the current Directors is as follows:  

Jim Mellon2 
Gregory Bailey 
Douglas Grant 
Alan Clarke 

Number 
17/03/23 
21,669,314 
17,957,290 
533,951 
55,048 

Number 
31/12/22 
21,669,314 
17,957,290 
533,951 
55,048 

Number 
31/12/21 
21,522,650 
17,835,750 
518,177 
53,422 

1  Lynchwood  Nominees  Limited  holds  17,039,623  Ordinary 

Shares in trust for Aeternitas Imperium Privatstiftung. 

2  Burnbrae Limited holds 19,341,332 Ordinary Shares. Burnbrae 
Limited  is  100%  beneficially  owned  by  Jim  Mellon.  Denham 
Eke,  Executive  Vice-Chairman  of  MFG  is  also  a  director  of 
Burnbrae  Limited.  Vidacos  Nominees  Limited  also  holds 
2,327,982 Ordinary Shares in trust for Jim Mellon. 

3  Vidacos Nominees Limited holds 4,966,000 Ordinary Shares in 

trust for Zeno Capital Limited. 

4  Vidacos  Nominees Limited holds 17,957,290  Ordinary  Shares 

in trust for Gregory Bailey. 

The  number  of  share  options  /  RSUs  held  by  the  current 
Directors is as follows:  

Douglas Grant 
James Smeed 

Number 
17/03/22 
1,775,000 
175,000 

Number 
31/12/22 
1,775,000 
175,000 

Number 
31/12/21 
700,000 
- 

Directors’ liability insurance 
The  Group  maintains  insurance  cover  for  Directors’  potential 
liability. 

Fixed and intangible assets 
The movement in fixed and intangible assets during the year are 
set  out  in  notes  22  and  23  respectively  to  the  financial 
statements.  

Staff 
At 31 December 2022, there were 168 members of staff (2021: 
132), of whom 13 were part-time (2021: 12). 

Investment in subsidiaries 
Investments  in  the  Company’s  subsidiaries  are  disclosed  in 
note 31 to the financial statements.  

Number 

% of 
issued capital 

Auditor 
KPMG Audit LLC, being eligible, has expressed its willingness 
to continue in office.  

Lynchwood Nominees Limited1 
Jim Mellon2 
Gregory Bailey4 
Vidacos Nominees Limited3 
Island Farms Limited 

23,374,816 
21,669,314 
17,957,290 
6,507,771 
4,350,856 

20.31 
18.83 
15.61 
5.66 
3.78 

On behalf of the Board 

J Mellon 
Executive Chairman 
20 March 2023 

Page | 27  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONTENTS 

  Page 

  Page 

  Notes to the consolidated and company financial statements 

Assurance 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
Independent Auditor’s Report 

Consolidated and company financial statements 
Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other 
Comprehensive Income 
Company  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 
Comprehensive Income 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
Company Statement of Financial Position 
Consolidated and Company Statement of Changes 
in Equity 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
Company Statement of Cash Flows 

29 
30 

36 

38 

39 
40 
41 

42 
43 

  Basis of preparation 

1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 

Reporting entity 
Basis of accounting 
Functional and presentation currency 
Use of judgements and estimates 

Financial risk review and fair value 
5.       Financial instruments – Classification 
6. 
7. 

Financial instruments – Fair values 
Financial risk review 

Operating segments 
Net interest income 
Net fee and commission income  
Personnel expenses 

Performance for the year 
8. 
9. 
10. 
11. 
12.  Other expenses 
Impairment  on 
13. 
customers 

loans  and  advances 

to 

14.  Profit before tax payable 
15. 
Income tax expense 
16.  Earnings per share 

  Assets 

17.  Cash and cash equivalents  
18.  Debt securities 
19.  Financial assets 
20. 
21.  Trade and other receivables 
22.  Property,  plant  and  equipment  and  right-of-

Loans and advances to customers 

use assets 
Intangible assets 

23. 

Liabilities and equity 
24.  Deposits from customers 
25.  Creditors and accrued charges 
26.  Deferred consideration 
Loan notes 
27. 
28.  Pension liability 
29.  Called up share capital 

  Group composition 

List of associates 

30. 
31.  List of subsidiaries 
32.  Subsidiaries and non-controlling interests 
33.  Acquisition of financial instrument 
34.  Goodwill 
35. 

Investment in Group undertakings 

  Other information 

Leases 

36.  Related parties transactions 
37. 
38.  Regulators 
39.  Contingent liabilities 
40.  Non-IFRS measures 
41.  Subsequent events 
42.  Financial risk management 

  Accounting policies 

43.  Basis of measurement 
44.  Significant accounting policies 

44 
44 
44 
44 

44 
46 
48 

54 
55 
55 
55 
56 
56 

56 
56 
57 

58 
58 
58 
58 
60 
60 

61 

61 
61 
61 
62 
62 
65 

67 
67 
67 
70 
70 
71 

71 
72 
73 
73 
73 
73 
74 

76 
77 

Page | 28  

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 

responsible 

The  Directors  are 
for  keeping  adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the 
Parent Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy  at  any  time  the  financial  position  of  the  Parent 
Company  and  enable  them  to  ensure  that  its  financial 
statements comply with the Isle of Man Companies Act 2006.   

They  are  responsible  for  such  internal  control  as  they 
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether 
due to fraud or error, and have general responsibility for taking 
such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the 
assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other 
irregularities.   

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included on 
the  Company’s  website.    Legislation  in  the  Isle  of  Man 
governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  of  financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and  the  Group  and  Parent  Company  financial  statements  in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.   

The  Directors  are  required  to  prepare  Group  and  Parent 
Company  financial  statements  for  each  financial  year.  As 
required by the AIM Rules of the London Stock Exchange they 
are  required  to  prepare  the  Group  financial  statements  in 
accordance  with 
in 
accordance  with  UK-adopted 
international  accounting 
standards (“UK-adopted IFRS” or “IFRSs”) as applicable to an 
Isle of Man Company and applicable law and have elected to 
prepare  the  Parent  Company  financial  statements  on  the 
same basis. 

international  accounting  standards 

The  Directors  must  not  approve  the  financial  statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of 
the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of 
their  profit  or  loss  for  that  period.    In  preparing  each  of  the 
Group  and  Parent  Company 
the 
Directors are required to:  

financial  statements, 

 

select  suitable  accounting policies and  then apply  them 
consistently;   

  make  judgements  and  estimates  that  are  reasonable, 

relevant and relevant;   

 

 

 

state  whether  they  have  been  prepared  in  accordance 
with IFRSs;   

assess  the  Group  and  Parent  Company’s  ability  to 
continue  as  a  going  concern,  disclosing,  as  applicable, 
matters related to going concern; and   

use  the  going  concern  basis  of  accounting  unless  they 
either  intend  to  liquidate  the  Group  or  the  Parent 
Company  or  to  cease  operations  or  have  no  realistic 
alternative but to do so.   

Page | 29  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Our opinion is unmodified 
We have audited the Consolidated Financial Statements of Manx Financial Group PLC (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries (together, 
the "Group"), which comprise the Consolidated and Parent Company Statements of Financial Position as at 31 December 2022, the 
Consolidated and Parent Company Statements of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income, Changes in Equity and Cash Flows 
for the year then ended, and notes, comprising significant accounting policies and other explanatory information. 

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated and parent company financial statements: 

 

 
 

give a true and fair view of the financial position of the Company and Group as at 31 December 2022, and of the Company and 
Group’s financial performance and cash flows for the year then ended; 
have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards; and 
have been properly prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Isle of Man Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We  conducted  our  audit  in  accordance  with  International  Standards  on  Auditing  (UK)  (“ISAs  (UK)”)  and  applicable  law.  Our 
responsibilities are described below. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, and are independent of the Company and Group 
in accordance with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard as applied to listed entities. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our opinion. 

Key audit matters: our assessment of the risks of material misstatement 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the consolidated and 
parent company financial statements and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to 
fraud) identified by us, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; 
and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the consolidated and 
parent company financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these 
matters.  In arriving at our audit opinion above, the key audit matters were as follows (unchanged from 2021). 

and 

advances 

Key audit matter 
Loans 
customers – wholesale funding 
Loans 
to 
customers  £79,116,000  (2021: 
£33,587,000) 

advances 

and 

to 

Impairment Provision £nil (2021: 
£nil) 

Expense for the year £nil (2021: 
£365,000) 

Refer to page 23 the Audit, Risk 
and  Compliance  Committee 
(“ARCC”) Report, note 4 (Use of 
Judgements  and  Estimates  - 
Assumptions  and  Estimation 
Uncertainties), note 7(A) (Credit 
Risk),  note  13  (Impairment  on 
to 
Loans 
Customers), note 20 (Loans and 
Advances  to  Customers),  note 
42 
Risk 
Management  –  Credit  risk)  and 
(Accounting 
note 
Policy 
of 
for 
Financial Instruments). 

and  Advances 

Impairment 

(Financial 

44(G)(vii) 

(B) 

to  calculate 

The risk    
Basis: 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting 
framework 
the 
expected credit loss model. Impairment is measured 
on an instrument by instrument basis except where 
instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured on a collective basis under the expected 
credit loss model.  

impairment  using 

Wholesale  Funding  comprises  Block  Finance, 
Wholesale Funding Agreements and Stocking Plans. 
These  books  comprise  individually  significant  loan 
balances and are in the nature of a secured business 
loan. The security is principally an underlying pool of 
loans. 

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the 
amount and timing of future recoveries which require 
an assessment of matters such as future economic 
conditions and the value of collateral.  

Risk: 
Estimates, by their nature, give rise to a higher risk 
of material misstatement due to error or fraud. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment,  we  determined  that  the  impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation 
uncertainty, including increased uncertainty from the 
residual  economic  impacts  of  COVID19  as  well  as 
the financially volatile environment caused by rising 
inflation  and  interest  rate  pressure  with  a  potential 
range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  our 
materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole, 
and possibly many times that amount. 

Our response 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  origination  of  wholesale 
funding loans, including borrower due diligence. 

Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  Group’s  loan  impairment 
process such as the timely recognition of impairment 
provisions, 
the  completeness  and  accuracy  of 
reports  used  in  the  loan  impairment  process  and 
management review processes over the calculation 
of collective and specific provisions. 

Test of details: 
We  agreed  the  specific  provisions  included  in  the 
financial  statements 
to  Group’s  provisioning 
schedule  and  vouched  that  this  schedule  was 
correctly  extracted  from  the  loans  and  advances 
system, including the arrears information. 

We  tested  all  specific  provisions.  This  included 
challenging  Group’s  assessment  of  the  specific 
provision, taking account of such factors as: amount 
of arrears; compliance with covenant requirements, 
financial  standing  of  the  business  –  by  inspecting 
latest  available  accounts  and  status  of  underlying 
security  –  by 
inspecting  a  sample  of  security 
documentation. 

Use of KPMG Specialists: 
We  involved  KPMG  specialists  to  examine  the 
methodology  of  the  Group’s  expected  credit  loss 
model  and  its  compliance  with  requirements  of 
accounting standards. 

Historical comparison: 
We  challenged 
in  collective 
the 
impairment  models  by  comparison  to  default  and 

inputs  used 

Page | 30  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Key audit matter 

The risk    

and 

advances 

to 
Loans 
customers  –  individual  finance 
agreements 
Loans 
and 
customers £212,359,000  
(2021: £195,664,000) 

advances 

to 

Impairment provision   
£14,223,000  
(2021: £8,719,000) 

Expense for the year £3,992,000 
(2021: £4,360,000)  

Refer  to  page  23  of  the  ARCC 
Report,  note  4 
(Use  of 
Judgements  and  Estimates  - 
Assumptions  and  Estimation 
Uncertainties), note 7(A) (Credit 
Risk),  note  13  (Impairment  on 
Loans 
to 
Customers), note 20 (Loans and 
Advances  to  Customers),  note 
42 
Risk 
Management  –  Credit  risk)  and 
(Accounting 
note 
of 
for 
Policy 
Financial Instruments). 

and  Advances 

Impairment 

(Financial 

44(G)(vii) 

(B) 

to  calculate 

Basis: 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting 
framework 
the 
expected credit loss model. Impairment is measured 
on an instrument by instrument basis except where 
instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured on a collective basis under the expected 
credit loss model.  

impairment  using 

Individual finance agreements include hire purchase 
finance  leases  and  unsecured  loans  to  individuals 
and companies. Any security is typically the specific 
assets financed. 

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the 
amount and timing of future recoveries which require 
an assessment of matters such as future economic 
conditions and the value of collateral.  

Risk: 
Estimates, by their nature, give rise to a higher risk 
of material misstatement due to error or fraud. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment,  we  determined  that  the  impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation 
uncertainty, including increased uncertainty from the 
residual  economic  impacts  of  COVID19  as  well  as 
the financially volatile environment financially volatile 
environment  caused  by  rising  inflation  and  interest 
rate  pressure  with  a  potential  range  of  reasonable 
the 
outcomes  greater 
financial statements as a whole, and possibly many 
times that amount. 

than  our  materiality  for 

Impairment  of  goodwill  and 
intangible assets   
 Goodwill  
£10,576,000 (2021: £6,320,000)  
and Intangibles Assets  
£2,703,000 (2021: £2,508,000).  

Basis 
Goodwill  and  intangible  assets  are  significant  and 
the estimated recoverable amount of these balances 
is subjective due to the inherent uncertainty involved 
in forecasting and discounting future cash flows for 
the  goodwill  impairment  test  and  in  performing  a 

Our response 
recovery experience across each of the loan finance 
categories. 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about the degree of estimation uncertainty involved 
at  arriving  at  the  provisions  in  accordance  with the 
relevant  financial  reporting  framework  and  specific 
circumstances of the Group. 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  origination  of  individual 
finance loans, including borrower due diligence. 

Understanding  the  design  and  implementation  of 
controls  in  respect  of  the  Group’s  loan  impairment 
process such as the timely recognition of impairment 
the  completeness  and  accuracy  of 
provisions, 
reports  used  in  the  loan  impairment  process  and 
management review processes over the calculation 
of collective and specific provisions. 

Use of KPMG Specialists: 
We  involved  KPMG  specialists  to  examine  the 
methodology  of  the  Group’s  expected  credit  loss 
model  and  its  compliance  with  the  requirements  of 
accounting standards. 

Challenging management assumptions and inputs: 
We  agreed  the  specific  provisions  included  in  the 
financial  statements  to  management’s  provisioning 
schedule  and  vouched  that  this  schedule  was 
correctly  extracted  from  the  loans  and  advances 
system, including the arrears information. 

those  against 
loans.  This 

We tested a sample of specific provisions, weighted 
individually  significant 
towards 
impaired 
challenging 
included 
management’s assessment of the specific provision, 
taking  into  account  such  factors  as:  the  number  of 
repayments  in  arrears;  the  known  whereabouts  of 
the  hirer  /  lessee  and  of  the  assets  under  finance; 
and the amounts received under agreed repayment 
plans,  where  scheduled  repayments  under  the 
original agreement are no longer being met. 

Historical comparison: 
We  challenged 
in  collective 
the 
impairment  models  by  comparison  to  default  and 
recovery experience across each of the loan finance 
categories. 

inputs  used 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about the degree of estimation uncertainty involved 
at  arriving  at  the  provisions  in  accordance  with the 
relevant  financial  reporting  framework  and  specific 
circumstances of the Group. 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding the controls in respect of the Group’s 
goodwill  and  intangibles  assets  impairment  review 
process such as the timely recognition of impairment 

Page | 31  

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Key audit matter 

Impairment 
£200,000 (2021: £nil) 

loss  on  Goodwill 

The risk    
review  for  indicators  of  impairment  for  intangible 
assets. 

Our response 
provisions  and  the  completeness  and  accuracy  of 
reports used in the impairment review process. 

note 

Refer  to  page  23  of  the  ARCC 
Report,  note  4 
(Use  of 
Judgements  and  Estimates  - 
Assumptions  and  Estimation 
Uncertainties), 
23 
(Intangible  Assets),  note  35 
(Investment 
Group 
Undertakings),  44(A)  (Basis  for 
Consolidation  of  Subsidiaries 
Financial 
and 
the  Parent 
Statements  of 
Company), 
44(K) 
(Intangible Assets and Goodwill) 
and  note  44(L)  (Impairment  of 
Non-Financial Assets). 

Separate 

note 

in 

of 

Recoverability 
Parent 
Company’s  subordinated  loans 
to 
in 
subsidiaries 

investment 

and 

Investment in subsidiaries 
£23,597,000  
(2021: £22,597,000)  

Loans and amounts due from 
Group undertakings 
£17,635,000  
(2021: £13,832,000).  

Refer  to  page  24  of  the  ARCC 
report,  note  35  (Investment  in 
Group  Undertakings)  and  note 
44(A)(vi) 
(Separate  Financial 
Statements of the Company). 

Goodwill  and  intangible  assets  have  arisen  on  the 
Group’s acquisition of businesses including lenders, 
independent financial advisers and finance brokers, 
each of which is identified by the Group as a Cash 
Generating Unit. 

Risk: 
The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment, we determined that the value in use of 
the Cash Generating Units containing goodwill and / 
or intangible assets has a high degree of estimation 
uncertainty, including increased uncertainty from the 
residual  economic  impacts  of  COVID19  as  well  as 
the financially volatile environment caused by rising 
inflation  and  interest  rate  pressure  with  a  potential 
range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  our 
materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole. 
The  financial  statements  (note  34)  disclose  the 
sensitivity estimated by the Group.  

Basis: 
The  carrying  value  of 
the  Parent  Company’s 
investment  in  subsidiaries  and  loans  and  amounts 
due from Group undertakings represents 94% (2021: 
97%) of the Parent Company’s total assets.  

Risk: 
The assessment of carrying value is not at a high risk 
of  significant  misstatement  or  subject  to  significant 
judgement as the carrying value is supported by the 
audited net asset value of the subsidiaries. However, 
due  to  its  materiality  in  the  context  of  the  Parent 
Company financial statements, this is considered to 
be the area that had the greatest effect on our overall 
Parent Company audit. 

Evaluating experts engaged by management: 
We have evaluated the competence, capabilities and 
objectivity of the management’s expert; obtained an 
understanding  of  the  work  of  that  expert  and 
evaluated the appropriateness of that expert’s work 
as audit evidence for the recognition of goodwill and 
intangible assets acquired. 

Use of KPMG Specialists: 
We involved our own valuation specialists who have 
tested  reasonableness  of 
in 
particular  those  relating  to  each  cash  generating 
unit’s 
forecast  revenue  growth,  profit  margins, 
discount rate and the valuation method used. 

the  assumptions 

Benchmarking assumptions:  
Comparing  the  Group’s  assumptions  to  externally 
derived  data  in  relation  to  key  inputs  such  as 
projected  economic  growth,  competition  and  cost 
inflation. 

Indicators of impairment for intangible assets: 
Analysing  latest  financial  data  for  the  business 
related to the relevant goodwill and intangible asset 
to  assess  whether  there  are  any  indicators  of 
impairment,  such  as  losses  being  made  or  a 
downturn in sales. 

Sensitivity analysis:  
Performing  headroom  analysis  on  the  assumptions 
noted above. 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about 
the 
the  sensitivity  of 
impairment  assessment 
in  key 
assumptions  reflected  in  the  risks  inherent  in  the 
valuation of goodwill and intangible assets. 
Our audit procedures included: 

the  outcome  of 
to  changes 

the 

relevant 

Tests of detail: 
Comparing  the  carrying  amount  of  100%  of  the 
Parent  Company’s  investments  in  subsidiaries  and 
loans  and  amounts  due  from  Group  undertakings 
with 
subsidiaries’  and  Group 
undertaking’s audited statement of financial position 
to identify whether their financial position supported 
the  carrying  amount  of  the  Parent  Company’s 
investments  in  those  subsidiaries  and  loans  and 
amounts  due  from  Group  undertakings,  assessing 
whether those subsidiaries and Group undertakings 
have  historically  been  profit-making  and evaluating 
budgeted forecasts in line with our knowledge of the 
respective  subsidiaries  and  the  current  economic 
conditions in  which those subsidiaries operate. 

Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit 
Materiality for the consolidated financial statements as a whole was set at £206,000 (2021: £120,000), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Group profit before tax (forecasted) of £4,120,000 (2021: £2,400,000), of which it represents approximately 5.0% (2021: 
5.0%). 

Page | 32  

 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit (continued) 
Materiality for the Parent Company financial statements as a whole was set at £123,000 (2021: £120,000), determined with reference 
to a benchmark of Parent Company total assets, but reduced to align with materiality for the Group financial statements. 

In line with our audit methodology, our procedures on individual account balances and disclosures were performed to a lower threshold, 
performance materiality, so as to reduce to an acceptable level the risk that individually immaterial misstatements in individual account 
balances add up to a material amount across the consolidated financial statements as a whole. Performance materiality for the Group 
was set at 75% (2021: 75%) of materiality for the financial statements as a whole, which equates to £154,000 (2021: £90,000) for the 
Group  and  £92,000  (2021:  £54,000)  for  the  Company.  We  applied  this  percentage  in  our  determination  of  performance  materiality 
because we did not identify any factors indicating an elevated level of risk. 

We reported to the Audit Committee any corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £10,000 (2021: £6,000) for the 
Group and £6,150 (2021: 6,000) for the Company, in addition to other identified misstatements that warranted reporting on qualitative 
grounds..  Our  audit  of  the  Group  was  undertaken  to  the  materiality  level  specified  above,  which  has  informed  our  identification  of 
significant risks of material misstatement and the associated audit procedures performed in those areas as detailed above.  

The Group audit team audits all components of the group except Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited (“NRFL”) which represents 2.0% 
(2021: 2.0%) of the Group’s total assets. Group reporting is received for NRFL, subject to a materiality level set by the Group audit team. 

Detailed audit instructions were sent to the auditor of NRFL. These instructions covered the significant audit areas that should be covered 
by  this  audit  (which  included  the  relevant  risks  of  material  misstatement  detailed  above)  and  set  out  the  information  required  to  be 
reported to the group audit team. 

Going concern 
The Directors have prepared the consolidated and company financial statements on the going concern basis as they do not intend to 
liquidate the Group or the Company or to cease their operations, and as they have concluded that the Group and the Company's financial 
position means that this is realistic. They have also concluded that there are no material uncertainties that could have cast significant 
doubt over their ability to continue as a going concern for at least a year from the date of approval of the consolidated financial statements 
(the “going concern period"). 

In our evaluation of the Directors' conclusions, we considered the inherent risks to the Group and the Company's business model and 
analysed how those risks might affect the Group and the Company's financial resources or ability to continue operations over the going 
concern period. The risks that we considered most likely to affect the Group and the Company's financial resources or ability to continue 
operations over this period were the recoverability of financial assets subject to credit risk as a result of economic downturn due to the 
residual impacts of COVID19 and the financially volatile environment caused by increased inflation and interest rates pressure. 

We  considered  whether  this  risk  could  plausibly  affect  the  liquidity  in  the  going  concern  period  by  comparing  severe,  but  plausible 
downside scenarios that could arise from this risk against the level of available financial resources indicated by the Group’s financial 
forecasts. 

We  considered  whether  the  going  concern  disclosure  in  the  Directors’  Report  gives  a  full  and  accurate  description of  the  Directors' 
assessment of going concern. 

Our conclusions based on this work: 

  we consider that the Directors' use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the consolidated and company 

financial statements is appropriate; 

  we have not identified, and concur with the Directors' assessment that there is not, a material uncertainty related to events or 
conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group and the Company's ability to continue as a 
going concern for the going concern period; and 

  we found the going concern disclosure in the notes to the consolidated financial statements to be acceptable. 

However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions and as subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent 
with judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made, the above conclusions are not a guarantee that the Group and the 
Company will continue in operation. 

Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect 
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to fraud 
To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud risks”) we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an incentive 
or pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to commit fraud. Our risk assessment procedures included: 

 

 
 

enquiring of management as to the Group’s policies and procedures to prevent and detect fraud as well as enquiring whether 
management have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud; 
reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance; and 
using analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships. 

Page | 33  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect (continued) 
As required by auditing standards, we perform procedures to address the risk of management override of controls, in particular the risk 
that management may be in a position to make inappropriate accounting entries. On this audit we do not believe there is a fraud risk 
related to revenue recognition because the Group’s revenue streams are simple in nature with respect to accounting policy choice, and 
are easily verifiable to external data sources or agreements with little or no requirement for estimation from management. We did not 
identify any additional fraud risks. 

We performed procedures including: 

 

 

identifying journal entries and other adjustments to test based on risk criteria and comparing any identified entries to supporting 
documentation; and 
incorporating an element of unpredictability in our audit procedures. 

Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to non-compliance with laws and regulations 
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the consolidated financial 
statements  from  our  sector  experience  and  through  discussion  with  management  (as  required  by  auditing  standards),  and  from 
inspection of the Group’s regulatory and legal correspondence, if any, and discussed with management the policies and procedures 
regarding compliance with laws and regulations. As the Group is regulated, our assessment of risks involved gaining an understanding 
of the control environment including the entity’s procedures for complying with regulatory requirements. 

The  Group  is  subject  to  laws  and  regulations  that  directly  affect  the  consolidated  financial  statements  including  financial  reporting 
legislation and taxation legislation and we assessed the extent of compliance with these laws and regulations as part of our procedures 
on the related financial statement items. 

The Group is subject to other laws and regulations where the consequences of non-compliance could have a material effect on amounts 
or disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, for instance through the imposition of fines or litigation or impacts on the Group 
and the Company’s ability to operate. We identified financial services regulation as being the area most likely to have such an effect, 
recognising the regulated nature of the Group’s activities and its legal form. Auditing standards limit the required audit procedures to 
identify  non-compliance  with  these  laws  and  regulations  to  enquiry  of  management  and  inspection  of  regulatory  and  legal 
correspondence, if any. Therefore, if a breach of operational regulations is not disclosed to us or evident from relevant correspondence, 
an audit will not detect that breach. 

Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or breaches of law or regulation 
Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material misstatements 
in the consolidated financial statements, even though we have properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with auditing 
standards. For example, the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and transactions reflected in 
the consolidated financial statements, the less likely the inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards would identify it.  

In addition, as with any audit, there remains a higher risk of non-detection of fraud, as this may involve collusion, forgery, intentional 
omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect material misstatement. 
We are not responsible  for preventing  non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to  detect non-compliance  with all laws and 
regulations. 

Other information 
The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the annual report 
but does not include the consolidated financial statements and our auditor's report thereon. Our opinion on the consolidated financial 
statements does not cover the other information and we do not express an audit opinion or any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the consolidated financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the consolidated financial statements or our knowledge obtained 
in the audit, or otherwise  appears to be materially misstated. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that  there is a 
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report in this regard. 

We have nothing to report on other matters on which we are required to report by exception. 

Respective responsibilities 
Directors' responsibilities 
As explained  more fully in their statement set out on page 29, the Directors are responsible for: the preparation of the consolidated 
financial statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to 
enable  the  preparation  of  consolidated financial statements  that  are  free from material  misstatement,  whether due  to  fraud or error; 
assessing the Group and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; 
and using the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Company or to cease operations, 
or have no realistic alternative but to do so.  

Page | 34  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Respective responsibilities (continued) 
Auditor's responsibilities 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high level of 
assurance but does not guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement 
when  it  exists.  Misstatements  can  arise  from  fraud  or  error  and  are  considered  material  if,  individually  or  in  aggregate,  they  could 
reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the consolidated financial statements.  

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 

The purpose of this report and restrictions on its use by persons other than the Company's members, as a body 
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with section 80(C) of the Companies Act 2006. Our 
audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an 
auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone 
other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

KPMG Audit LLC 
Chartered Accountants 
Heritage Court 
41 Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man  
IM1 1LA    

20 March 2023 

Page | 35  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  PROFIT  OR  LOSS  AND  OTHER 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Interest revenue calculated using the effective interest rate method 
Other interest income 
Interest expense 

Net interest income 

Fee and commission income 
Fee and commission expense 
Depreciation on leasing assets 

Net trading income 

Other operating income 
(Loss) / gain on financial instruments 
Realised gain / (loss) on debt securities 
Revaluation on acquisition of subsidiary 

Operating income 

Personnel expenses  
Other expenses 
Provision for impairment on loans and advances to customers 
Depreciation 
Amortisation and impairment of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees, net of tax 
VAT recovery 

Profit before tax payable 

Income tax expense 

Profit for the year  

9 

10 
10 
22 

19 
18 
32 

11 
12 
13  
22 
23 
30 
21 

14 

15 

2022 
£000 

28,978 
1,765 
(6,391) 

2021 
£000 

21,010 
1,937 
(4,967) 

24,352 

17,980 

4,719 
(3,569) 
(16) 

4,621 
(3,339) 
(269) 

25,486 

18,993 

314 
(19) 
292 
- 

365 
30 
(1) 
660 

26,073 

20,047 

(9,764) 
(5,806) 
(3,990) 
(738) 
(582) 
18 
- 

5,211 

(537) 

4,674 

(7,156) 
(4,500) 
(4,360) 
(675) 
(458) 
32 
113 

3,043 

(234) 

2,809 

Page | 36  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  PROFIT  OR  LOSS  AND  OTHER 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (CONTINUED) 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Profit for the year  

Other comprehensive income:  

Items that will be reclassified to profit or loss  
Unrealised gain / (loss) on debt securities 

Items that will never be reclassified to profit or loss 
Revaluation gain on property, plant and equipment 
Actuarial gain on defined benefit pension scheme taken to equity 
Recognition of deferred tax credit on defined benefit pension 

Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to owners  

Profit attributable to: 
Owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Total comprehensive income attributable to: 
Owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Earnings per share – Profit for the year 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

Earnings per share – Total comprehensive income for the year 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

The notes on pages 44 to 88 form part of these financial statements.  

The Directors believe that all results derive from continuing activities. 

18 

22 
28 

32 

32 

16 
16 

16 
16 

2022 
£000 

4,674 

131 

- 
407 
- 

2021 
£000 

2,809 

(18) 

15 
172 
67 

5,212 

3,045 

4,331 
343 
4,674 

4,869 
343 
5,212 

4.07 
3.15 

4.54 
3.50 

2,793 
16 
2,809 

3,029 
16 
3,045 

2.46 
1.97 

2.66 
2.13 

Page | 37  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE 
INCOME 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Dividend income 
Interest income 
Other income 

Operating income 

Personnel expenses 
Administration expenses 
Depreciation expense 
Amortisation expense 
Impairment of intercompany receivable 

Profit before tax payable 

Tax payable 

Profit for the year  

Total comprehensive income for the year 

The notes on pages 44 to 88 form part of these financial statements.  

The Directors believe that all results derive from continuing activities. 

11 

22 

2022 
£000 

1,575 
522 
69 

2,166 

(127) 
- 
(65) 
(2) 
- 

1,972 

- 

1,972 

1,972 

2021 
£000 

1,259 
518 
78 

1,855 

(129) 
(59) 
(91) 
(2) 
(545) 

1,029 

- 

1,029 

1,029 

Page | 38  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

As at 31 December  

Assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Equity held at Fair Value Through Profit or Loss 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Investment in associates 
Goodwill 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Deferred consideration 
Loan notes 
Pension liability 
Deferred tax liability 

Total liabilities 

Equity 
Called up share capital 
Profit and loss account 
Revaluation reserve 
Non-controlling interest 

Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

Notes 

2022 
£000 

2021 
£000 

17 
18 
33  
20 
21 
22 
23 
30 
34 

22,630 
40,675 
122 
291,475 
4,211 
6,714 
2,703 
155 
10,576 

20,279 
40,987 
68 
229,251 
1,947 
7,257 
2,508 
136 
6,320 

24 
25 
26, 6(ii), 32 
27 
28 
15 

29 

22 
32 

379,261 

308,753 

304,199 
13,108 
262 
31,332 
237 
353 

253,459 
4,745 
1,023 
23,672 
687 
182 

349,491 

283,768 

19,195 
10,371 
15 
189 

29,770 

19,133 
5,781 
15 
56 

24,985 

379,261 

308,753 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 20 March 2023 and signed on its behalf by: 

Jim Mellon 
Executive Chairman 

Denham Eke 
Executive Vice-Chairman  Chief Executive Officer  

Douglas Grant 

The notes on pages 44 to 88 form part of these financial statements. 

Page | 39  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

As at 31 December  

Assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Amounts due from Group undertakings 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Investment in subsidiaries 
Subordinated loans 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Amounts due to Group undertakings 
Loan notes 

Total liabilities 

Equity 
Called up share capital 
Profit and loss account 

Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

The notes on pages 44 to 88 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

17 
21 
35 
22 

31 
35 

25 
35 
27 

29 

2022 
£000 

1,761 
562 
9,907 
201 
25 
23,597 
7,728 

43,781 

440 
122 
31,332 

31,894 

19,195 
(7,308) 

11,887 

43,781 

2021 
£000 

430 
472 
6,104 
263 
20 
22,597 
7,728 

37,614 

501 
3,309 
23,672 

27,482 

19,133 
(9,001) 

10,132 

37,614 

Page | 40  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 

Attributable to owners of the Company 

Group 

Balance as at 1 January 2021 

Profit for the year  
Other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners 
Dividends declared 
Acquisition  of  subsidiary  with  non-
controlling interest 

Share 
capital 
£000 

19,121 

- 
- 

12 
- 

Balance as at 31 December 2021 

19,133 

Profit for the year 
Other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners 
Dividend declared (see note 29) 
Acquisition  of  subsidiary  with  non-
controlling interest 

- 
- 

62 
- 

Profit 
and loss 
account 
£000 

3,230 

2,793 
221 

(197) 
(266) 

5,781 

4,331 
538 

(279) 
- 

Revaluation 
reserve 
£000 

- 

- 
15 

- 
- 

Total 
£000 

22,351 

2,793 
236 

(185) 
(266) 

15 

24,929 

- 
- 

- 
- 

4,331 
538 

(217) 
- 

Non-
controlling 
interests 
£000 

84 

16 
- 

- 
(44) 

56 

343 
- 

- 
(210) 

Total  
equity 
£000 

22,435 

2,809 
236 

(185) 
(310) 

24,985 

4,674 
538 

(217) 
(210) 

Balance as at 31 December 2022 

19,195 

10,371 

15 

29,581 

189 

29,770 

Company 

Balance as at 1 January 2021 

Profit for the year 

Dividends declared (see note 29) 

Balance as at 31 December 2021 

Profit for the year 

Transactions with owners 
Dividend declared (see note 29) 

Balance as at 31 December 2022 

The notes on pages 44 to 88 form part of these financial statements. 

Share 
capital 
£000 

19,121 

- 

12 

19,133 

- 

62 

Profit and 
loss 
account 
£000 

(9,833) 

1,029 

(197) 

(9,001) 

1,972 

(279) 

Total  
equity 
£000 

9,288 

1,029 

(185) 

10,132 

1,972 

(217) 

19,195 

(7,308) 

11,887 

Page | 41  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 

For the year ended 31 December 

RECONCILIATION OF PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION TO OPERATING CASH FLOWS 

Profit before tax 

Adjustments for: 
Depreciation 
Amortisation of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees 
Contingent consideration interest expense 
Pension charge included in personnel expenses 
Gain / (loss) on financial instruments 
Revaluation on acquisition of subsidiary 

Changes in: 
Equity at FVTPL 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 

Net cash flow from trading activities 

Changes in: 
Loans and advances to customers 
Deposits from customers 
Pension contribution 

Cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities 

CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

Cash from operating activities 
Cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities 
Interest received 
Interest paid 
Income taxes paid 

Net cash (used in) / from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment, excluding right-of-use assets 
Purchase of intangible assets 
Sale of property, plant and equipment 
Acquisition of subsidiary or associate, net of cash acquired 
Sale / (purchase) of debt securities 
Deferred consideration on acquisition of subsidiary 

Net cash used in investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Receipt of loan notes 
Payment of lease liabilities (capital) 
Dividend paid 

Net cash from financing activities 

Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January  

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 

The notes on pages 44 to 88 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

2022 
£000 

2021 
£000 

5,211 

3,043 

22 
23 
30 
6(ii) 
28 
19 
32 

28 

22 
23 
22 
32 

6(ii),26 

27 
37 
29 

754 
582 
(18) 
102 
14 
19 
- 

6,664 

- 
(2,228) 
1,436 

5,872 

(83,066) 
50,740 
(57) 

(26,511) 

(26,511) 
30,136 
(6,184) 
(157) 

(2,716) 

(1,473) 
(504) 
2,083 
(1,785) 
442 
(937) 

(2,174) 

7,660 
(202) 
(217) 

7,241 

2,351 

20,279 

22,630 

944 
458 
(32) 
114 
13 
(30) 
(660) 

3,850 

4 
223 
(109) 

3,968 

(53,816) 
35,174 
(98) 

(14,772) 

(14,772) 
22,624 
(4,936) 
(10) 

2,906 

(2,109) 
(481) 
961 
(555) 
(15,473) 
(120) 

(17,777) 

1,450 
(201) 
(152) 

1,097 

(13,774) 

34,053 

20,279 

Page | 42  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS  

For the year ended 31 December 

RECONCILIATION OF PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION TO OPERATING CASH FLOWS 

Notes 

2022 
£000 

2021 
£000 

Profit before tax 

Adjustments for: 
Depreciation 
Amortisation 
Dividend income 

Changes in: 
Amounts due from group undertakings 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Amounts due to Group undertakings 

Cash outflow from operating activities 

CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

Cash from operating activities 
Cash outflow from operating activities 

Net cash used in operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Purchase of intangible assets 

Net cash used in investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Receipt of loan notes 
Payment of finance lease liability 
Dividend paid 

Net cash from financing activities 

Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January  

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 

The notes on pages 44 to 88 form part of these financial statements.  

22 

27 

1,972 

1,029 

63 
2 
(1,575) 

462 

(2,228) 
(90) 
100 
(4,187) 

(5,943) 

91 
2 
(1,259) 

(137) 

(2,910) 
(163) 
66 
1,012 

(2,132) 

(5,943) 

(5,943) 

(2,132) 

(2,132) 

(8) 

(8) 

7,660 
(99) 
(279) 

7,282 

1,331 

430 

1,761 

(15) 

(15) 

1,450 
(99) 
(152) 

1,199 

(948) 

1,378 

430 

Page | 43  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

1.  Reporting entity 
Manx  Financial  Group  PLC  (“Company”)  is  a  company  incorporated  in  the  Isle  of  Man.  The  Company’s  registered  office  is  at 
Clarendon House, Victoria Street, Douglas, Isle of Man, IM1 2LN. The consolidated financial statements of the Company for the year 
ended 31 December 2022 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (“Group”) including Conister Bank Limited (the “Bank”). The 
Group is primarily involved in the provision of financial services. 

2.  Basis of accounting 
The  consolidated  and  the  separate  financial  statements  of  the  Company  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  international 
accounting standards in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards (“UK-adopted IFRS” or “IFRSs”), on a going 
concern basis as disclosed in the Directors’ Report. 

3.  Functional and presentation currency 
These financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the Company’s functional currency. All amounts have been 
rounded to the nearest thousand, unless otherwise indicated. All subsidiaries of the Group have pounds sterling as their functional 
currency.  

4.  Use of judgements and estimates 
The  preparation  of  financial  statements  requires  management  to  make  judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions  that  affect  the 
application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from 
these estimates. 

Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the 
period in which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected.  

Assumptions and estimation uncertainties 
Information  about  assumptions  and  estimation  uncertainties  at  year-end  that  have  a  significant  risk  of  resulting  in  a  material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the next financial year is included in the following notes: 

  Note 23 and 34 – impairment test of intangible assets and goodwill: key assumptions underlying recoverable amounts; 
  Note  44(G)(vii)  –  measurement  of  Expected  Credit  Loss  (“ECL”)  allowance  for  loans  and  advances  to  customers  and 
assessment of impairment allowances where loans are in default or arrears: key assumptions in determining the weighted-
average loss rate; and 

5.  Financial instruments – Classification 
For description of how the Group classifies financial assets and liabilities, see note 44(G)(ii). 

The  following  table  provides  reconciliation  between  line  items  in  the  statement  of  financial  position  and  categories  of  financial 
instruments. 

Group 

31 December 2022 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Equity  held  at  Fair  Value  Through 
Profit or Loss 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Total financial assets 

Deposits from customers 
Creditor and accrued charges 
Deferred consideration 
Loan notes 
Total financial liabilities 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI – 
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

122 
- 
- 
122 

- 
- 
262 
- 
262 

- 
40,675 

- 
- 
- 
40,675 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

22,630 
- 

- 
291,475 
4,211 
318,316 

304,199 
13,108 
- 
31,332 
348,639 

Total 
carrying 
amount 
£000 

22,630 
40,675 

122 
291,475 
4,211 
359,113 

304,199 
13,108 
262 
31,332 
348,901 

Page | 44  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

5.  Financial instruments – Classification (continued) 

Group 

31 December 2021 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Equity  held  at  Fair  Value  Through 
Profit or Loss 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Total financial assets 

Deposits from customers 
Creditor and accrued charges 
Deferred consideration 
Loan notes 

Total financial liabilities 

Company 

31 December 2022 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Amounts 
from 
undertakings 
Subordinated loans 
Total financial assets 

due 

Group 

Creditor and accrued charges 
Amounts due to Group undertakings 
Loan notes 
Total financial liabilities 

Company 

31 December 2021 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
from 
Amounts 
undertakings 
Subordinated loans 
Total financial assets 

due 

Group 

Creditor and accrued charges 
Amounts due to Group undertakings 
Loan notes 
Total financial liabilities 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI –  
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

68 
- 
- 
68 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
1,023 
- 

1,023 

- 
40,987 

- 
- 
- 
40,987 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

20,279 
- 

- 
229,251 
1,947 
251,477 

253,459 
4,745 
- 
23,672 

Total carrying 
amount 

£000 

20,279 
40,987 

68 
229,251 
1,947 
292,532 

253,459 
4,745 
1,023 
23,672 

281,876 

282,899 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI – 
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

1,761 
562 

9,907 
7,728 
19,958 

440 
122 
31,332 
31,894 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI – 
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

430 
472 

6,104 
7,728 
14,734 

501 
3,309 
23,672 
27,482 

Total 
carrying 
amount 
£000 

1,761 
562 

9,907 
7,728 
19,958 

440 
122 
31,332 
31,894 

Total 
carrying 
amount 
£000 

430 
472 

6,104 
7,728 
14,734 

501 
3,309 
23,672 
27,482 

Page | 45  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values 
For description of the Group’s fair value measurement accounting policy, see note 44(G)(vi). 

The following table shows the carrying amounts and fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities, including their levels in the 
fair value hierarchy. It does not include fair value information for financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value if 
the carrying amount is a reasonable approximation of fair value. 

31 December 2022 

Financial assets measured at fair value 
Debt securities 
Equity held at Fair Value Through Profit or Loss 

Financial assets not measured at fair value 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 

Financial liabilities measured at fair value 
Deferred consideration 

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Loan notes 

31 December 2021 

Financial assets measured at fair value 
Debt securities 
Equity held at Fair Value Through Profit or Loss 

Financial assets not measured at fair value 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 

Financial liabilities measured at fair value 
Deferred consideration 

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Loan notes 

Carrying 
amount 
Total 
£000 

40,675 
122 
40,797 

22,630 
291,475 
4,211 
318,316 

262 
262 

304,199 
13,108 
31,332 

348,639 

Carrying 
amount 
Total 
£000 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

20,279 
229,251 
1,947 
251,477 

1,023 
1,023 

253,459 
4,745 
23,672 
281,876 

Fair value 

Level 1 
£000 

Level 2 
£000 

Level 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

40,675 
- 
40,675 

- 
122 
122 

40,675 
122 
40,797 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

262 
262 

262 
262 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

Fair value 

Level 1 
£000 

Level 2 
£000 

Level 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

40,987 
- 
40,987 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
68 
68 

- 
- 
- 
- 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

- 
- 
- 
- 

1,023 
1,023 

1,023 
1,023 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

Page | 46  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

Significant 
inputs 

unobservable 

Not applicable. 

Inter-relationship 
between 
significant unobservable inputs 
and fair value measurement 
Not applicable. 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values (continued) 

Measurement of fair values 
i. Valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs  
Type 

Valuation technique 

Debt securities 

Equities  at  Fair  Value  Through 
Profit or Loss 

Deferred consideration 

comparison 

Market 
/ 
discounted  cash  flow:  The  fair 
value is estimated considering 
a net present value calculated 
using  discount  rates  derived 
from quoted yields of securities 
with similar maturity and credit 
rating that are traded  in active 
markets. 
Net asset value 

Expected  net 
cash 
derived from the entity 

flows 

Discounted  cash  flows:  The 
valuation  model  considers  the 
present  value  of  the  expected 
future  payments,  discounted 
using  a  risk-adjusted  discount 
rate. 

Expected cash flows £291,340 
(2021: £1,133,820). 

Risk-adjusted  discount 
14% (2021: 14%). 

rate 

The estimated fair value would 
if 
increase 
the 
(decrease) 
expected  cash 
flows  were 
higher (lower). 
The estimated fair value would 
increase (decrease) if: 
-the expected cash flows were 
higher (lower); or 
-the risk-adjusted discount rate 
was lower (higher).  

ii. Level 3 recurring fair values 
Reconciliation of Level 3 fair values 
The following table shows a reconciliation from the opening balances to the closing balances for Level 3 fair values. 

Balance at 1 January 

Assumed in a business combination (Note 32) 

Finance costs 
Net change in fair value (unrealised) 

Payment (note 26) 
Balance at 31 December 

2022 
£000 

1,023 

- 

102 
74 
176 
(937) 
262 

2021 
£000 

672 

387 

114 
(30) 
84 
(120) 
1,023 

Sensitivity analysis 
For the fair value of contingent consideration, reasonably possible changes at the reporting date to one of the significant unobservable 
inputs, holding other inputs constant would have the following effects. 

31 December 2022 

Expected cash flows (10% movement) 
Risk-adjusted discount rate (1% movement) 

31 December 2021 

Expected cash flows (10% movement) 
Risk-adjusted discount rate (1% movement) 

Profit or loss 

Increase 
£000 

Decrease 
£000 

29 
5 

(29) 
(3) 

Profit or loss 

Increase 
£000 

Decrease 
£000 

113 
12 

66 
(8) 

Page | 47  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

7.  Financial risk review 
Risk management 
This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to financial risks and the Group’s management of capital. For information 
on the Group’s financial risk management framework, see note 42.  

A. Group Credit risk 
For definition of credit risk and information on how credit risk is mitigated by the Group, see note 42. 

The key assumptions used in determining the weighted-average loss rate are loss given default rate and probability of default. These 
metrics are calculated at individual product level (for example Hire Purchase, Lease). In determining probability of default, the Group 
considers market  consensus estimates of the UK’s forecast GDP,  inflation and   interest rate over the  applicable loan term of the 
product. Over the next 3 years, the Group has forecast average GDP growth of -0.6%, inflation of 4.1% and BOE base rate of 2.6%. 

i. Credit quality analysis 
Loans and advances to customers 
Explanation of the terms ‘Stage 1’, ‘Stage 2’ and ‘Stage 3’ is included in note 44(G)(vii). 

An analysis of the credit risk on loans and advances to customers is as follows: 
Group 

2022 

2021 

Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

  Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

Grade A 
Grade B 
Grade C 
Gross value 

273,332 
- 
391 
273,723 

- 
5,006 
- 
5,006 

- 
9,347 
17,622 
26,969 

273,332 
14,353 
18,013 
305,698 

213,102 
- 
342 
213,444 

- 
5,735 
541 
6,276 

- 
5,594 
12,656 
18,250 

213,102 
11,329 
13,539 
237,970 

Allowance for impairment 
Carrying value 

(303) 
273,420 

(3) 
5,003 

(13,917) 
(14,223) 
13,052  291,475 

(503) 
212,941 

(124) 
6,152 

(8,092) 
10,158 

(8,719) 
229,251 

Loans are graded A to C depending on the level of risk. Grade A relates to agreements with the lowest risk, Grade B with medium 
risk and Grade C relates to agreements with the highest of risk.  

The following table sets out information about the overdue status of loans and advances to customers in Stage 1, 2 and 3: 
Group 

2022 

Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

2021 
Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

269,130 
4,593 
- 
273,723 

- 
604 
4,402 
5,006 

- 
- 
26,969 
26,969 

269,130 
5,197 
31,371 
305,698 

  210,491 
2,953 
- 
213,444 

- 
- 
6,276 
6,276 

- 
- 
18,250 
18,250 

210,491 
2,953 
24,526 
237,970 

For Stage 3 loans and advances, the Bank holds collateral with a value of £12,927,000 (2021: £11,625,250) representing security 
cover of 48% (2021: 64%). 

Debt securities, cash and cash equivalents 
The following table sets out the credit quality of liquid assets:  
Group 

Government bonds and treasury bills 
Rated A to A+ 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Rated A to A+ 

Trade and other receivables 
Unrated 

The analysis has been based on Standard & Poor’s ratings. 

2022 
£000 

2021 
£000 

40,675 

40,987 

22,630 

20,279 

4,211 

1,947 

67,516 

63,213 

Page | 48  

31 December  

Current 
Overdue < 30 days 
Overdue > 30 days 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
A. Credit risk (continued) 
ii. Collateral and other credit enhancements 
The Group holds collateral in the form of the underlying assets (typically private and commercial vehicles, plant and machinery) to 
loan arrangements as security for HP, finances leases, vehicle stocking plans, block discounting, wholesale funding arrangements, 
integrated wholesale funding arrangements and secured commercial loan balances, which are sub-categories of loans and advances 
to customers. In addition, the Group will take debentures, mortgages, personal and corporate guarantees, fixed and floating charges 
on specific assets such as cash and shares.  The terms of enforcing such security can only occur on default, and when realised can 
only be used to settle the amount of debt and related collection fees.  On occasion the Bank may realise a surplus if the defaulting 
party loses title to the underlying security as part of enforcement. In addition, the commission share schemes have an element of 
capital indemnified.  During 2022, 61.0% of loans and advances had an element of capital indemnification (2021: 76.0%).   

At the time of granting credit within the sub-categories listed above, the loan balances due are secured over the underlying assets 
held as collateral.  

iii. Amounts arising from ECL 
See accounting policy in note 44(G)(vii). 

IFRS 9 significantly overhauled the requirements and methodology used to assess credit impairments by transitioning to a forward-
looking  approach  based  on  an  expected  credit  loss  model.    The  new  impairment  model  applies  to  financial  assets  measured  at 
amortised cost, contract assets and debt investments at FVOCI, but not to investments in equity instruments.   

After a detailed review, the Group devised and implemented an impairment methodology in light of the IFRS 9 requirements outlined 
above noting the following: 

  A  Significant  Increase  in  Credit  Risk  (“SICR”)  is  always deemed  to  occur  when  the  borrower  is  30  days  past  due  on  its 
contractual  payments.    If  the  Group  becomes  aware  ahead  of  this  time  of  non-compliance  or  financial  difficulties  of  the 
borrower, such as loss of employment, avoiding contact with the Group then a SICR has also deemed to occur.  

  A receivable is always deemed to be in default and credit-impaired when the borrower is 90 days past due on its contractual 
payments  or  earlier  if  the  Group  becomes  aware  of  severe  financial  difficulties  such  as  bankruptcy,  individual  voluntary 
arrangements, abscond or disappearance, fraudulent activity or other similar events.  

  The  ECL  was  derived  by  reviewing  the  Group’s  loss  rate  and  loss-given-default  over  the  past  5  years  by  product  and 

geographical segment. 

  The Group has assumed that the future economic conditions will broadly mirror the current environment and therefore the 

forecasted loss levels in the next 3 years will match the Group’s experience in recent years. 

  For  portfolios  where  the  Group  has  never  had  a  default  in  its  history  or  has  robust  credit  enhancements  such  as  credit 

insurance or default indemnities for the entire portfolio, then no IFRS 9 provision is made.   

  If the Group holds objective evidence through specifically assessing a credit-impaired receivable and believes it will go on 
to  completely recover the debt due to the collateral held and  cooperation with  the borrower, then  no  IFRS 9 provision is 
made. 

There have been no significant changes to ECL assumptions from the prior year. 

iv. Concentration of credit risk 

Geographical 
Lending is restricted to individuals and entities with Isle of Man, UK or Channel Islands addresses.  

Segmental 
The Bank is exposed to credit risk with regard to customer loan accounts, comprising HP and finance lease balances, unsecured 
personal loans, secured commercial loans, block discounting, vehicle stocking plan  loans and wholesale funding agreements.  In 
addition, the Bank lends via significant introducers into the UK. There was no introducer that accounted for more than 20% of the 
Bank’s total lending portfolio at the end of 31 December 2022 (2021: none). 

Page | 49  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
B. Group Liquidity risk 
For the definition of liquidity risk and information on how liquidity risk is manged by the Group, see note 41. 

i. Exposure to liquidity risk 
The key measure used by the Group for managing liquidity risk is the ratio of net liquid assets to deposits from customers and short-
term funding. For this purpose, net liquid assets includes cash and cash equivalents and investment-grade debt securities for which 
there is an active and liquid market. 

Details of the reported Group ratio of net liquid assets to deposits from customers at the reporting date and during the reporting year 
were as follows: 

At 31 December  
Average for the year 
Maximum for the year 
Minimum for the year 

2022 
20% 
22% 
25% 
19% 

2021 
24% 
25% 
28% 
20% 

ii. Maturity analysis for financial liabilities and financial assets 
The table below shows the Group’s financial liabilities classified by their earliest possible contractual maturity, on an undiscounted 
basis including interest due at the end of the deposit term. Based on historical data, the Group’s expected actual cash flow from these 
items vary from this analysis due to the expected re-investment of maturing customer deposits.  

Residual contractual maturities of financial liabilities as at the reporting date (undiscounted): 

31 December 2022 

£000  

Sight-
8 days

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

31 December 2021 

Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

10,878 
691 

11,569 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

6,864 
291 

7,155 

6,838 
116 

6,954 

27,346 
1,796 

29,142 

65,153 
3,717 

68,870 

104,662 
13,196 

117,858 

104,024 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

4,743 
83 

4,826 

18,359 
1,210 

19,569 

63,733 
1,253 

64,986 

61,891 
10,995 

72,886 

>1 year
- 3 years
£000

88,036 
9,091 

97,127 

>1 year
- 3 years
£000

81,670 
22,354 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

14,557 
6,697 

21,254 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

16,738 
9,053 

25,791 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
590 

590 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
869 

869 

Total 
£000 

311,104 
49,157 

360,261 

Total 
£000 

260,364 
32,845 

293,209 

Maturity of assets and liabilities at the reporting date: 

31 December 2022 

Assets 
Cash  
Debt securities 
Loans and advances 
Other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
– 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year 
- 3 years 
£000 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

>5 
years 
£000 

Total 
£000 

22,630 
3,986 
8,038 
122 

34,776 

10,878 
650 

11,528 

- 
7,987 
10,952 
- 

18,939 

6,380 
- 

6,380 

- 
20,785 
27,913 
- 

48,698 

26,552 
1,500 

28,052 

- 
7,917 
40,730 
- 

48,647 

64,251 
3,286 

67,537 

- 
- 
47,813 
5,786 

53,599 

- 
- 
106,755 
- 

- 
- 
46,176 
5,140 

- 
- 
3,098 
  13,433 

22,630 
40,675 
291,475 
24,481 

106,755 

51,316 

  16,531 

379,261 

103,561 
12,399 

115,960 

78,984 
20,627 

99,611 

13,593 
6,240 

19,833 

- 
590 

590 

304,199 
45,292 

349,491 

Page | 50  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
B. Liquidity risk (continued) 
ii. Maturity analysis for financial liabilities and financial assets (continued) 

Maturity of assets and liabilities at the reporting date (continued): 

31 December 2021 

Assets 
Cash  
Debt securities 
Loans and advances 
Other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month 
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
– 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year 
- 3 years 
£000 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

20,279 
- 
9,271 
68 

29,618 

6,864 
238 

7,102 

- 
5,001 
8,372 
- 

13,373 

4,285 
- 

4,285 

- 
20,994 
12,378 
- 

33,372 

17,565 
1,000 

18,565 

- 
14,992 
25,458 
- 

40,450 

62,831 
946 

63,777 

- 
- 
30,835 
3,186 

34,021 

60,790 
10,512 

71,302 

- 
- 
94,395 
- 

94,395 

85,350 
7,967 

93,317 

- 
- 
44,081 
6,018 

50,099 

15,774 
8,777 

24,551 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
- 
4,462 
8,964 

Total 
£000 

20,279 
40,987 
229,252 
18,236 

13,426 

308,754 

- 
869 

869 

253,459 
30,309 

283,768 

iii. Liquidity reserves 
The following table sets out the components of the Group’s liquidity reserves: 

Balances with other banks 
Unencumbered debt securities 
Total liquidity reserves 

2022 
Carrying 
amount 
£000 

20,954 
40,675 
61,629 

2022  
Fair  
value 
£000 

20,954 
40,675 
61,629 

2021 
Carrying 
amount 
£000 

20,279 
40,987 
61,266 

2021  
Fair  
value 
£000 

20,279 
40,987 
61,266 

C. Group Market risk 
For the definition of market risk and information on how the Group manages the market risks of trading and non-trading portfolios, 
see note 42.  

The following table sets out the allocation of assets and liabilities subject to market risk between trading and non-trading portfolios: 

31 December 2022 

Assets subject to market risk 
Debt securities 
Equity held at Fair Value Through Profit or Loss 
Total 

31 December 2021 

Assets subject to market risk 
Debt securities 
Equity held at Fair Value Through Profit or Loss 
Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

40,675 
122 
40,797 

Market risk measure 

Trading 
portfolios 
£000 

  Non-trading 
portfolios 
£000 

- 
- 
- 

40,675 
122 
40,797 

Market risk measure 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Trading 
portfolios 
£000 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

- 
- 
- 

Non-
trading 
portfolios 
£000 

40,987 
68 
41,055 

Page | 51  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
C. Group Market risk (continued) 
i. Exposure to interest rate risk  
The following tables present the interest rate mismatch position between assets and liabilities over the respective maturity dates. The 
maturity dates are presented on a worst-case basis, with assets being recorded at their latest maturity and deposits from customers 
at their earliest. 

31 December 2022 

  Sight- 
  1 month 
£000 

>1month 
- 3months 
£000 

>3months 
- 6months 
        £000 

 >6months
- 1 year 
  £000 

  >1 year  
- 3 years 
       £000 

 >3 years 
- 5 years 
       £000 

 >5 years 
       £000 

  Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 
  £000 

Total 
£000 

Assets 
22,630 
Cash & cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
11,973 
Loans and advances to customers  18,990 
- 
Other assets 

- 
20,785 
27,913 
- 

- 
7,917 
  40,730 
- 

- 
- 
  47,813 
- 

- 
- 
  106,755 
- 

- 
- 
  46,176 
- 

- 
- 
3,098 
- 

- 
- 
- 
24,481 

22,630 
40,675 
291,475 
24,481 

Total assets 

53,593 

  48,698 

  48,647 

  47,813 

  106,755 

  46,176 

  3,098 

  24,481 

  379,261 

Liabilities and equity 
Deposits from customers 
Other liabilities 
Total equity 

17,258 
650 
- 

26,552 
1,500 
- 

  64,251 
3,286 
- 

  103,561 
905 
- 

  78,984 
  20,627 
- 

  13,593 
6,240 
- 

Total liabilities and equity 

17,908 

28,052 

  67,537 

  104,466 

  99,611 

  19,833 

- 
237 
- 

237 

- 
11,847 
29,770 

41,617 

304,199 
45,292 
29,770 

379,261 

Interest rate sensitivity gap 

35,685 

20,646 

  (18,890) 

  (56,653) 

7,144 

  26,343 

2,861 

(17,136) 

Cumulative 

35,685 

56,331 

  37,441 

  (19,212) 

  (12,068) 

  14,275 

  17,136 

- 

31 December 2021 

  Sight- 
  1 month 
£000 

>1month 
- 3months 
£000 

>3months 
- 6months 
        £000 

 >6months
- 1 year 
  £000 

  >1 year  
- 3 years 
       £000 

 >3 years 
- 5 years 
       £000 

 >5 years 
       £000 

  Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 
  £000 

- 

- 

Total 
£000 

Assets 
Cash & cash equivalents 
20,279 
5,001 
Debt securities 
Loans and advances to customers  17,642 
- 
Other assets 

- 
20,994 
12,378 
- 

- 
  14,992 
  25,458 
- 

- 
- 
  30,835 
- 

- 
- 
  94,395 
- 

- 
- 
  44,081 
- 

- 
- 
4,462 
- 

- 
- 
- 
18,236 

20,279 
40,987 
229,251 
18,236 

Total assets 

42,922 

  33,372 

  40,450 

  30,835 

  94,395 

  44,081 

  4,462 

  18,236 

  308,753 

Liabilities and equity 
Deposits from customers 
Other liabilities 
Total equity 

11,149 
238 
- 

17,565 
1,000 
- 

  62,831 
946 
- 

  60,790 
7,050 
- 

  85,350 
7,967 
- 

  15,774 
8,777 
- 

Total liabilities and equity 

11,387 

18,565 

  63,777 

  67,840 

  93,317 

  24,551 

- 
687 
- 

687 

- 
3,644 
24,985 

28,629 

253,459 
30,309 
24,985 

308,753 

Interest rate sensitivity gap 

31,535 

14,807 

  (23,327) 

  (37,005) 

1,078 

  19,530 

3,775 

(10,393) 

Cumulative 

31,535 

46,342 

  23,015 

  (13,990) 

  (12,912) 

6,618 

  10,393 

- 

- 

- 

The Bank monitors the impact of changes in interest rates on interest rate mismatch positions using a method consistent with the 
FSA required reporting standard. The methodology applies weightings to the net interest rate sensitivity gap in order to quantify the 
impact of an adverse change in interest rates of 2.0% per annum (2021: 2.0%). The following tables set out the estimated total impact 
of such a change based on the mismatch at the reporting date: 

31 December 2022 

Sight- 
  1 month 

>1month 
-3months 

>3months 
- 6months 

>6months 
  - 1 year 

>1 year  
- 3 years 

>3 years 
  - 5 years 

>5 years 

Interest rate sensitivity gap £000  35,685 

20,646 

(18,890) 

(56,653) 

Weighting 

£000 

0.000 

0.003 

- 

62 

0.007 

(132) 

0.014 

(793) 

7,144 

0.027 

193 

26,343 

0.054 

1,423 

2,861 

0.115 

329 

Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 

(17,136) 

- 

- 

Total 

- 

- 

1,082 

Page | 52  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
C. Group Market risk (continued) 
i. Exposure to interest rate risk (continued) 

31 December 2021 

Sight- 
  1 month 

>1month 
-3months 

>3months 
- 6months 

>6months 
  - 1 year 

>1 year  
- 3 years 

>3 years 
  - 5 years 

  >5 years 

Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 

Interest rate sensitivity gap £000 

31,535 

14,807 

(23,327)

(37,005)

1,078  

19,530  

3,775 

(10,393)

Weighting 

£000 

0 

- 

0.003 

44 

0.007 

(163)

0.014 

(518)

0.027  

0.054 

0.115 

29  

1,055 

434  

- 

- 

Total 

- 

- 

881 

D. Group Capital Management 
i. Regulatory capital 
MFG  and  its  subsidiaries  maintain  sufficient  capital  stock  to  cover  risks  inherent  in  their  principal  operating  activities.  The  lead 
regulator of the Group’s wholly owned subsidiary, the Bank, is the FSA. The FSA sets and monitors capital requirements for the Bank. 
The  Bank  maintains  a  capital  base  to  meet  the  capital  adequacy  requirements  of  the  FSA.    There  have  been  no  changes  to  its 
approach to capital management from the prior year. 

The Bank’s regulatory capital consists of the following elements. 

  Common  Equity  Tier  1  (“CET1”)  capital,  which  includes  ordinary  share  capital,  retained  earnings  and  reserves  after 

adjustment for deductions for goodwill, intangible assets and intercompany receivable. 
Tier 2 capital, which includes qualifying subordinated liabilities and any excess of impairment over expected losses. 

 

The Bank’s Tier 1 and Total Capital regulatory ratios stood at 12.4% (2021: 15.2%) and 15.2% (2021: 19.1%) respectively as at 31 
December 2022.  The Bank complied with all capital requirements externally imposed on it in the year with minimum Tier 1 and Overall 
Capital ratio of 8.5% and 14% respectively. 

The FSA’s approach to the measurement of capital adequacy is primarily based on monitoring the relationship of the capital resources 
requirement to available capital resources. The FSA sets individual capital guidance (“ICG”) for the Bank in excess of the minimum 
capital resources requirement. A key input to the ICG setting process is the Bank’s internal capital adequacy assessment process 
(“ICAAP”). 

The Bank is also regulated by the FCA in the UK for credit and brokerage related activities. 

Further details of the Bank’s management of capital are described in the Risk Management Report on page 10. 

ii. Capital allocation 
Management  uses  regulatory  capital  ratios  to  monitor  its  capital  base.  The  allocation  of  capital  between  specific  operations  and 
activities is, to a large extent, driven by optimisation of the return achieved on the capital allocated. The amount of capital allocated 
to each operation or activity is based primarily on regulatory capital requirements. 

E. Company Financial Risk Review 
i. Credit risk 
The Company is exposed to credit risk primarily from deposits with banks and from its financing activities of Group entities. These 
balances include Trade and other receivables, Amounts due from Group undertakings, Investment in subsidiaries and Subordinated 
loans. Cash balances are held with institutions with a credit rating of A to A+. The Group’s primary credit exposure is to the Bank. The 
Investment in subsidiary and subordinated loan balance counterparties are disclosed in Note 31 and 35 respectively. Amounts due 
from  Group  undertakings  relate  to  balances  advanced  to  the  Group’s  subsidiary  (MVL)  for  the  acquisition  of  other  subsidiaries 
including PAL, BBSL, BLX and NRF. The Group manages its credit risk by ensuring that sufficient resources are allocated to credit 
management and capital allocation and using reputable financial institutions to hold its cash balances. 

ii. Liquidity risk 
The value and term of short term assets are monitored against those of the Company’s liabilities. The Company maintains sufficient 
liquid assets to meet liabilities as they fall due either by retaining Interest income from the Subordinated loan, Dividend income from 
subsidiary companies or raising  funds through the issue of Loan notes. Amounts due to / from Group undertakings are unsecured, 
interest-free and repayable on demand. 

iii. Market risk 
The  Company  does  not  have  exposure  to  foreign  exchange  risk  as  transactions  are  made  in  and  balances  held  in  Sterling.  The 
Company has both interest-bearing assets and liabilities. In order to manage interest rate risk, the Companies Subordinated loans 
and Loan notes are charged exclusively at fixed rates. 

Page | 53  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

8.  Operating segments 
Segmental information is presented in respect of the Group’s business segments. The Directors consider that the Group currently 
operates in one geographic segment comprising of the Isle of Man, UK and Channel Islands. The primary format, business segments, 
is based on the Group’s management and internal reporting structure. The Directors consider that the Group operates in three (2021: 
three)  product  orientated  segments  in  addition  to  its  investing  activities:  Asset  and  Personal  Finance  (including  provision  of  HP 
contracts,  finance  leases,  personal  loans,  commercial  loans,  block  discounting,  vehicle  stocking  plans  and  wholesale  funding 
agreements); Edgewater Associates Limited (provision of financial advice); and MFX Limited (provision of foreign currency transaction 
services).   

For the year ended 31 December 2022 

Interest  revenue  calculated  using  the  effective  interest  rate 
method 
Other interest income 
Interest expense 
Net interest income 
Components of Net Trading Income 
Net trading income 
Components of Operating Income 
Operating Income 
Depreciation 
Amortisation and impairment of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees, net of tax 
All other expenses 

Profit / (loss) before tax payable 

Capital expenditure 

Total assets 
Total liabilities 

Asset and 
Personal 
Finance 
£000 

28,978 

1,765 
(6,391) 
24,352 
(2,696) 
21,656 
587 
22,243 
(640) 
(494) 
- 
(17,226) 

3,883 

1,794 

332,689 
316,921 

Edgewater 
Associates 
£000 

MFX 
Limited 
£000 

Investing 
Activities 
£000 

- 

- 
- 
- 
2,096 
2,096 
- 
2,096 
(31) 
(81) 
- 
(1,943) 

41 

55 

2,248 
513 

- 

- 
- 
- 
1,734 
1,734 
- 
1,734 
(2) 
(5) 
- 
(314) 

1,413 

3 

543 
163 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
(65) 
(2) 
18 
(77) 

(126) 

1 

43,781 
31,894 

Total 
£000 

28,978 

1,765 
(6,391) 
24,352 
1,134 
25,486 
587 
26,073 
(738) 
(582) 
18 
(19,560) 

5,211 

1,853 

379,261 
349,491 

For the year ended 31 December 2021 

Interest revenue calculated using the effective interest 
rate method 
Other interest income 
Interest expense 
Net interest income 
Components of Net Trading Income 
Net Trading Income 
Components of Operating Income 
Operating income 
Depreciation 
Amortisation and impairment of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees, net of tax 
Intercompany write-off 
All other expenses 

Profit / (loss) before tax payable 

Capital expenditure 

Total assets 
Total liabilities 

Asset and 
Personal 
Finance 
£000 

21,010 

1,937 
(4,967) 
17,980 
(2,783) 
15,197 
1,054 
16,251 
(560) 
(373) 
58 
- 
(12,848) 

2,528 

3,083 

292,721 
265,751 

Edgewater 
Associates 
£000 

MFX 
Limited 
£000 

Investing 
Activities 
£000 

Total 
£000 

- 

- 
- 
- 
2,282 
2,282 
- 
2,282 
(22) 
(80) 
- 
- 
(2,066) 

114 

13 

2,330 
638 

- 

- 
- 
- 
1,514 
1,514 
- 
1,514 
(2) 
(3) 
- 
- 
(282) 

1,227 

1 

802 
61 

- 

21,010 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(91) 
(2) 
(26) 
(545) 
(162) 

(826) 

5 

1,937 
(4,967) 
17,980 
1,013 
18,993 
1,054 
20,047 
(675) 
(458) 
32 
(545) 
(15,358) 

3,043 

3,102 

12,900 
17,318 

308,753 
283,768 

Page | 54  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

9.  Net interest income 

Interest income 
Loans and advances to customers 
Total interest income calculated using the effective interest method 
Operating lease income  
Total interest income 

Interest expense 
Deposits from customers 
Loan note interest 
Lease liability 
Contingent consideration: interest expense 
Total interest expense 

2022 
£000 

28,978 
28,978 
1,765 
30,743 

(4,601) 
(1,610) 
(78) 
(102) 
(6,391) 

2021 
£000 

21,010 
21,010 
1,937 
22,947 

(3,512) 
(1,299) 
(42) 
(114) 
(4,967) 

Net interest income 

24,352 

17,980 

10.  Net fee and commission income 
In the following table, fee and commission income from contracts with customers in the scope of IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts 
with  Customers  is  disaggregated  by  major  type  of  services.  The  table  includes  a  reconciliation  of  the  disaggregated  fee  and 
commission income with the Group’s reportable segments. See note 44D regarding revenue recognition. 

Major service lines 
Independent financial advice income 
Foreign exchange trading income 
Asset and personal finance: Brokerage services income 
Debt collection 
Fee and commission income 

Fee and commission expense 

Net fee and commission income 

2022 
£000 

2,096 
1,743 
590 
290 
4,719 

2021 
£000 

2,282 
1,528 
510 
301 
4,621 

(3,569) 

(3,339) 

1,150 

1,282 

Fee and commission expense relates to commission paid to Brokerages which introduce new business to the Bank. 

11.  Personnel expenses 

Staff gross salaries  
Executive Directors’ remuneration 
Non-executive Directors’ fees 
Executive Directors’ pensions 
Executive Directors’ performance related pay 
Staff pension costs 
National insurance and payroll taxes 
Staff training and recruitment costs 
Equity Settled Restricted Stock Units (Note 29) 

Group 

Company 

2022 
£000 

(7,403) 
(507) 
(207) 
(41) 
(68) 
(397) 
(818) 
(305) 
(18) 

(9,764) 

2021 
£000 

(5,416) 
(440) 
(176) 
(34) 
(51) 
(330) 
(623) 
(86) 
- 

(7,156) 

2022 
£000 

- 
- 
(127) 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

(127) 

2021 
£000 

- 
- 
(129) 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

(129) 

The Company’s personnel expenses consist exclusively of Directors remuneration and fees for services rendered to the Company. 

Page | 55  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

12.  Other expenses 

Professional and legal fees 
Marketing costs 
IT costs 
Establishment costs 
Communication costs 
Travel costs 
Bank charges 
Insurance 
Irrecoverable VAT 
Other costs 
Impairment loss on goodwill  (See Note 34) 

2022 
£000 

(1,427) 
(363) 
(1,210) 
(366) 
(152) 
(297) 
(314) 
(333) 
(362) 
(782) 
(200) 

(5,806) 

2021 
£000 

(1,367) 
(264) 
(1,001) 
(317) 
(129) 
(104) 
(124) 
(344) 
(268) 
(582) 
- 

(4,500) 

13.  Impairment on loans and advances to customers 
The charge in respect of allowances for impairment comprises, excluding loss allowances on financial assets managed on a collective 
basis. 

Impairment allowances made 
Reversal of allowances previously made 

Total charge for provision for impairment 

2022 
£000 

(7,642) 
3,612 

(4,030) 

The credit in respect of allowances for impairment on financial assets managed on a collective basis comprises:  

Collective impairment allowances made 
Release of allowances previously made 

Total credit for allowances for impairment on financial assets managed on a collective basis 

2022 
£000 

(244) 
284 

40 

2021 
£000 

(5,457) 
1,055 

(4,402) 

2021 
£000 

(77) 
119 

42 

Total charge for allowances for impairment 

(3,990) 

(4,360) 

14.  Profit before tax payable 
The profit before tax payable for the year is stated after charging:  

Auditor’s remuneration:  

as Auditor current year 
 non-audit services 

Pension cost defined benefit scheme 
Expenses relating to short-term leases and low value assets 

15.  Income tax expense 
Group 

Current tax expense 
Current year 
Changes to estimates for prior years 

Deferred tax expense 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Tax expense  

Group 

Company 

2022 
£000 

(255) 
(11) 
(14) 
(92) 

2021 
£000 

(232) 
(2) 
(13) 
(64) 

2022 
£000 

- 
- 
- 
- 

2022 
£000 

(366) 
- 
(366) 

(171) 

(537) 

2021 
£000 

- 
- 
- 
- 

2021 
£000 

(132) 
(50) 
(182) 

(52) 

(234) 

Page | 56  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

15.  Income tax expense (continued) 
Group 

Reconciliation of effective tax rate 
Profit before tax  
Tax using the Bank’s domestic tax rate 
Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions 
Tax exempt income 
Changes to estimates for prior years 
R&D claim 
Tax expense 

% 

(10.0) 
3.6 
(2.4) 
(0.8) 
- 
(10.3) 

2022 
£000 

5,211 
(521) 
186 
(127) 
(43) 
- 
(537) 

% 

(10.0) 
5.0 
(1.2) 
(4.7) 
(1.4) 
(7.7) 

2021 
£000 

3,043 
(304) 
152 
(36) 
(144) 
(42) 
(234) 

The main rate of corporation tax in the Isle of Man is 0.0% (2021: 0.0%). However, the profits of the Group’s Isle of Man banking 
activities are taxed at 10.0% (2021: 10.0%). The profits of the Group’s subsidiaries that are subject to UK corporation tax are taxed 
at a rate of 19.0% (2021: 19.0%). The Company is subject to 0.0% tax. 

The value of tax losses carried forward reduced to nil and there is now a temporary difference related to accelerated capital allowances 
resulting in a £353,000 liability (2021: £182,000 liability). This resulted in an expense of £171,000 (2021: £52,000) to the Consolidated 
Income Statement offset by a deferred tax credit on the defined benefit pension through the OCI of £nil (2021: £67,000).  

16.  Earnings per share  

Profit for the year 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares in issue (basic) 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares in issue (basic) 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

2022 

2021 

£4,674,000 

£2,809,000 

114,763,883 
4.07 
3.15 

114,291,639 
2.46 
1.97 

£5,212,000 

£3,045,000 

114,763,883 
4.54 
3.50 

114,291,639 
2.66 
2.13 

The basic earnings per share calculation is based upon the profit for the year after taxation and the weighted average of the number 
of shares in issue throughout the year.  

As at: 

2022 

2021 

Reconciliation of weighted average number of Ordinary Shares in issue between 
basic and diluted 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (basic) 
Number of shares issued if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity 
Dilutive element of share options if exercised 

114,763,883 
38,225,772 
830,035 

114,291,639 
36,555,556 
- 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (diluted) 

153,819,660 

150,847,195 

Reconciliation of profit for the year between basic and diluted 

Profit for the year (basic) 
Interest expense saved if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity  

Profit for the year (diluted) 

£4,674,000 
£171,415 

£2,809,000 
£166,250 

£4,845,415 

£2,975,250 

The diluted earnings per share calculation assumes that all convertible loan notes and share options have been converted / exercised 
at the beginning of the year where they are dilutive.  

Page | 57  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

2021 
£000 

430 
- 

430 

2021 
£000 

- 

- 

16.  Earnings per share (continued) 

As at: 

Reconciliation of total comprehensive income for the year between basic and diluted 

Total comprehensive income for the year (basic) 
Interest expense saved if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity  

Total comprehensive income for the year (diluted) 

17.  Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash at bank and in hand 
Fixed deposit (less than 90 days) 

2022 

2021 

£5,212,000 
£171,415 

£3,045,000 
£166,250 

£5,383,415 

£3,211,250 

Group 

Company 

2022 
£000 

20,651 
1,979 

22,630 

2021 
£000 

18,278 
2,001 

20,279 

2022 
£000 

1,761 
- 

1,761 

Cash at bank includes an amount of £24,000 (2021: £56,000) representing receipts which are in the course of transmission. 

18.  Debt securities 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income: 
UK Government treasury bills 

Group 

Company 

2022 
£000 

40,675 

40,675 

2021 
£000 

40,987 

40,987 

2022 
£000 

- 

- 

UK Government Treasury Bills are stated at fair value and unrealised changes in the fair value are reflected in other comprehensive 
income. There were realised gains of £292,000 (2021: realised losses of £1,000) and unrealised gains of £131,000 (2021: unrealised 
losses of £18,000) during the year. 

19.  Financial assets 

Group 

Company 

Financial assets at FVOCI: 
(Loss) / gain on Deferred consideration (see note 6(ii)) 
Gain on equity instrument 

2022 
£000 

(74) 
55 

(19) 

The Bank acquired a new equity instrument in the previous financial year (See note 33). 

20.  Loans and advances to customers 

Group 

HP balances 
Finance lease balances 
Unsecured personal loans 
Vehicle stocking plans 
Wholesale funding arrangements 
Block discounting 
Secured commercial loans 
Secured personal loans 
Government backed loans 

Gross 
Amount 
£000 

87,142 
21,513 
47,735 
1,918 
30,904 
46,294 
12,753 
1,867 
55,572 
305,698 

2022 
Impairment 
Allowance 
£000 

(4,093) 
(3,782) 
(5,282) 
- 
- 
- 
(595) 
(90) 
(381) 
(14,223) 

Carrying 
Value 
£000 

83,049 
17,731 
42,453 
1,918 
30,904 
46,294 
12,158 
1,777 
55,191 
291,475 

2021 
£000 

30 
- 

30 

Gross 
Amount 
£000 

71,789 
28,131 
31,267 
1,675 
15,447 
16,465 
11,099 
1,739 
60,358 
237,970 

2022 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

2021 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

2021 
Impairment 
Allowance 
£000 

(4,107) 
(3,317) 
(537) 
- 
- 
- 
(519) 
- 
(239) 
(8,719) 

Carrying 
Value 
£000 

67,682 
24,814 
30,730 
1,675 
15,447 
16,465 
10,580 
1,739 
60,119 
229,251 

Page | 58  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

20.  Loans and advances to customers (continued) 

Collateral  is  held  in  the  form  of  underlying  assets  for  HP,  finance  leases,  vehicles  stocking  plans,  block  discounting,  secured 
commercial and personal loans and wholesale funding arrangements.  

Allowance for impairment 

Balance at 1 January 
Acquisition 
Allowance for impairment made 
Release of allowances previously made 
Write-offs 
Balance at 31 December 

Collective allowance for impairment 

Balance at 1 January 
Collective allowance for impairment made 
Release of allowances previously made 

Balance at 31 December 

Total allowances for impairment 

2022 
£000 

8,464 
4,620 
7,642 
(3,612) 
(3,106) 
14,008 

2022 
£000 

255 
244 
(284) 

215 

14,223 

2021 
£000 

6,824 
- 
5,457 
(1,055) 
(2,762) 
8,464 

2021 
£000 

297 
77 
(119) 

255 

8,719 

Advances on preferential terms are available to all Directors, management and staff. As at 31 December 2022 £1,228,334 (2021: 
£945,625) had been lent on this basis. In the Group’s ordinary course of business, advances may be made to Shareholders, but all 
such advances are made on normal commercial terms (see note 36).  

At the end of the current financial year 13 loan exposures (2021: 5) exceeded 10.0% of the capital base of the Bank:  

Exposure 

Block discounting facility 
Wholesale funding agreement 

Outstanding 
Balance 
2022 
£000 

68,209 
34,975 

Outstanding 
Balance 
2021 
£000 

16,465 
25,645 

HP and finance lease receivables 
Loans and advances to customers include the following HP and finance lease receivables: 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 

Gross investment in HP and finance lease receivables 

The investment in HP and finance lease receivables net of unearned income comprises: 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 

Net investment in HP and finance lease receivables 

2022 
£000 

51,368 
57,287 

108,655 

2022 
£000 

47,646 
53,134 

100,780 

Facility 
Limit 
£000 

40,536 
28,819 

2021 
£000 

34,833 
58,949 

93,782 

2021 
£000 

32,495 
54,994 

87,489 

Page | 59  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

21.  Trade and other receivables 

Other debtors 
Prepayments 
VAT claim 

Group 

Company 

2022 
£000 

2,334 
1,877 
- 
4,211 

2021 
£000 

1,449 
498 
- 
1,947 

2022 
£000 

494 
68 
- 
562 

2021 
£000 

1 
100 
371 
472 

After consultation with its professional advisors, the Bank made a notice of error correction (“NEC”) to the Isle of Man Government 
Customs & Exercise Division in respect of a repayment for overpaid VAT to the amount of £534,000 exclusive of statutory interest. 
The NEC relates to bad debt relief that was not claimed during the period from 1 April 1989 to 18 March 1997. The Bank recognised 
a receivable and income of £534,000 during 2020. The VAT claim was settled in full and the Bank received £699,000 during 2021. An 
additional recovery of £113,000 over and above the carrying amount was recognised in the previous year’s statement of profit or loss. 

22.  Property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2022 

Acquisition of subsidiary 
Additions 
Disposals 
As at 31 December 2022 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2022 
Acquisition of subsidiary 
Charge for year 
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

Buildings and 
Leasehold 
Improvements 
£000 

IT 
Equipment 
£000 

Furniture and 
Equipment 
£000 

Motor 
Vehicles1 
£000 

Right-of-
use assets 
£000 

681 

- 
64 
- 
745 

427 
- 
15 
- 

442 

303 

254 

522 

- 
81 
- 
603 

387 
- 
69 
- 

456 

147 

124 

5,814 

14 
1,280 
(1,369) 
5,739 

765 
14 
452 
(70) 

1,161 

4,578 

5,120 

818 

196 
48 
(866) 
196 

238 
65 
38 
(256) 

85 

111 

520 

1,444 

136 
380 
- 
1,960 

205 
- 
180 
- 

385 

1,575 

1,239 

Total 
£000 

9,279 

346 
1,853 
(2,235) 
9,243 

2,022 
79 
754 
(326) 

2,529 

6,714 

7,257 

1Included in motor vehicles are operating leases with the Group as lessor. Depreciation on leasing assets was £16,000 (2021: £269,000). 

Buildings with an original cost of £160,000 were revalued by independent valuers Vospers Limited to £175,000 on the basis of market value 
as at 15 September 2021. The valuation conforms to International Valuation Standards and was based on recent market transactions on 
arm's length terms for similar properties. The Directors consider the valuation of the buildings as at 31 December 2022 remains £175,000. 
The carrying amount that would have been recognised had the building been carried under the cost model would be £160,000. 

Company 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2022 
Additions 

As at 31 December 2022 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2022 
Charge for year 

As at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

Leasehold 
Improvements 
£000 

IT 
Equipment 
£000 

Furniture and 
Equipment 
£000 

Right-of 
use-assets 
£000 

234 
- 

234 

234 
- 

234 

- 

- 

18 
2 

20 

6 
- 

6 

14 

12 

17 
1 

18 

9 
2 

11 

7 

8 

424 
- 

424 

181 
63 

244 

180 

243 

Total 
£000 

693 
3 

696 

430 
65 

495 

201 

263 

Page | 60  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

23.  Intangible assets 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2022 
Acquisition of subsidiary (see note 32) 
Additions 
As at 31 December 2022 

Accumulated amortisation 
As at 1 January 2022 
Charge for year  

As at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

24.  Deposits from customers 

Retail customers: term deposits 
Corporate customers: term deposits 

25.  Creditors and accrued charges 

Other creditors and accruals 
Commission creditors 
Lease liability 
Taxation creditors 

Customer 
Contracts  
£000 

Intellectual  
Property Rights 
£000 

IT Software and 
Website 
Development 
£000 

2,657 
273 
- 
2,930 

865 
296 

1,161 

1,769 

1,792 

749 
- 
496 
1,245 

523 
- 

523 

722 

226 

2,541 
- 
8 
2,549 

2,051 
286 

2,337 

212 

490 

2022 
£000 

291,238 
12,961 

304,199 

Total 
£000 

5,947 
273 
504 
6,724 

3,439 
582 

4,021 

2,703 

2,508 

2021 
£000 

242,788 
10,671 

253,459 

Group 

Company 

2022 
£000 

10,096 
1,398 
1,614 
- 

13,108 

2021 
£000 

1,380 
1,520 
1,295 
550 

4,745 

2022 
£000 

232 
- 
208 
- 

440 

2021 
£000 

182 
- 
319 
- 

501 

26.  Deferred consideration 
Deferred consideration relates to contingent payments due to the sellers on the acquisition of BBSL and BLX respectively. 

On acquisition of BBSL on 16 April 2019, the Group agreed to pay the selling shareholders: 

 
 

50% of net profits in BBSL for 3 years post completion; and 
50%  of  the  incremental  net  profit  that  the  Group  benefits  from  as  a  result  of  taking  up  BBSL  loan  proposals  post 
completion up until the third anniversary. 

This  was  to  be  paid  on  each  anniversary  with  a  final  payment  in  year  4  for  the  unrealised  lending  profit.  The  Group  made  final 
instalment and settlement of this contingent consideration when it made the final payment of £781,095 during the period. 

On the acquisition of BLX on 11 October 2021, the Group agreed that a further conditional consideration of up to £483,663 is payable 
to the sellers in addition to the cash consideration paid. The total amount payable is contingent on the recovery of certain loans and 
advances found to be in default at acquisition. The fair value on acquisition date was determined to be £387,000. The Group made a 
payment of £156,093 to the sellers during the period. 

BBSL 
BLX 

2022 
£000 

- 
262 

262 

2021 
£000 

636 
387 

1,023 

Page | 61  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

27.  Loan notes 

Related parties 
J Mellon 
Burnbrae Limited 
Culminant Reinsurance Ltd 

Unrelated parties 

Group 

Company 

Notes 

JM 
BL 
CR 

UP 

2022 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
1,000 

5,950 
25,382 
31,332 

2021 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
1,000 

5,950 
17,722 
23,672 

2022 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
1,000 

5,950 
25,382 
31,332 

2021 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
1,000 

5,950 
17,722 
23,672 

JM - Two loans, one of £1,250,000 maturing on 26 February 2025 with interest payable of 5.4% per annum, and one of £500,000 
maturing on 31 July 2027, paying interest of 7.5% per annum. Both loans are convertible to ordinary shares of the Company at the 
rate of 7.5 pence. 

On 22 July 2022, JM and BL agreed to extend outstanding unsecured convertible loans of £1,750,000, expiring on 31 July 2022, for 
a further five years to 31 July 2027. A loan of £1,250,000 million is from BL and the remaining loan of £0.5 million is from JM himself. 
The new annual interest rate will be 7.5% (previously 5.0%) and the new conversion price will be 8.0 pence per share (previously 7.5 
pence). All other terms are unchanged, including the ability for the Company to repay the loans at any time during the period. 

BL – Three loans, one of £1,200,000 maturing on 31 July 2027, paying interest of 7.5% per annum, one of £1,000,000 maturing 25 
February 2025, paying  interest of 5.4% per annum, and one  of £1,000,000 maturing 28 February 2025 paying  interest of 6%  per 
annum.  Jim Mellon is the beneficial owner of BL and Denham Eke is also a director.  The £1,200,000 loan is convertible at a rate of 
7.5 pence.   

CR – One loan consisting of £1,000,000 maturing on 12 October 2025, paying interest of 6.0% per annum. Greg Bailey, a director, is 
the beneficial owner of CR.   

UP – Forty loans (2021: Forty-three), the earliest maturity date is 5 January 2023 and the latest maturity is 1 September 2027.  

With respect to the convertible loans, the interest rate applied was deemed by the Directors to be equivalent to the market rate at the 
time with no conversion option.  
28.  Pension liability 
The Conister Trust Pension and Life Assurance Scheme (“Scheme”) operated by the Bank is a funded defined benefit arrangement 
which  provides  retirement  benefits  based  on  final  pensionable  salary.  The  Scheme  is  closed  to  new  entrants  and  the  last  active 
member of the Scheme left pensionable service in 2011. 

The Scheme is approved in the Isle of Man by the Assessor of Income Tax under the Income Tax (Retirement Benefit Schemes) Act 
1978 and must comply with the relevant legislation. In addition, it is registered as an authorised scheme with the FSA in the Isle of 
Man  under the Retirement Benefits Scheme  Act 2000. The Scheme is subject to regulation  by the FSA but there  is no minimum 
funding regime in the Isle of Man.  

The  Scheme  is  governed  by  two  corporate  trustees,  Conister  Bank  Limited  and  Boal  &  Co  (Pensions)  Limited.  The  trustees  are 
responsible for the Scheme’s investment policy and for the exercise of discretionary powers in respect of the Scheme’s benefits. 

Page | 62  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

28.  Pension liability (continued) 
Exposure to risk 
The Company is exposed to the risk that additional contributions will be required  in order to fund the Scheme as a result of poor 
experience. Some of the key factors that could lead to shortfalls are: 

investment performance – the return achieved on the Scheme’s assets may be lower than expected; and 

 
  mortality – members could live longer than foreseen. This would mean that benefits are paid for longer than expected, increasing 

the value of the related liabilities. 

In  order to assess the sensitivity of the Scheme’s pension  liability to these risks, sensitivity analysis have been carried out. Each 
sensitivity analysis is based on changing one of the assumptions used in the calculations, with no change in the other assumptions. 
[The same method has been applied as was used to calculate the original pension liability and the results are presented in comparison 
to  that liability]. It should  be noted that  in  practice  it  is unlikely that one assumption will change  without a movement in the other 
assumptions; there may also be some correlation between some of these assumptions. It should also be noted that the value placed 
on the liabilities does not change on a straight line basis when one of the assumptions is changed. For example, a 2.0% change in 
an assumption will not necessarily produce twice the effect on the liabilities of a 1.0% change. 

No  changes  have  been  made  to  the  method  or  to  the  assumptions  stress-tested  for  these  sensitivity  analyses  compared  to  the 
previous period. The investment strategy of the Scheme has been set with regard to the liability profile of the Scheme. However, there 
are no explicit asset-liability matching strategies in place.  

Restriction of assets 
No adjustments have been made to the statement of financial position items as a result of the requirements of IFRIC 14 – IAS 19: The 
Limit  on  a  Defined  Benefit  Asset,  Minimum  Funding  Requirements  and  their  Interaction,  issued  by  IASB’s  International  Financial 
Reporting Interpretations Committee. 

Scheme amendments 
There have not been any past service costs or settlements in the financial year ending 31 December 2022 (2021: none). 

Funding policy 
The  funding  method  employed  to  calculate  the  value  of  previously  accrued  benefits  is  the  Projected  Unit  Method.  Following  the 
cessation of accrual of benefits when the last active member left service in 2011, regular future service contributions to the Scheme 
are no longer required. However, additional contributions will still be required to cover any shortfalls that might arise following each 
funding valuation. 

The  most  recent  triennial  full  actuarial  valuation  was  carried  out  at  31  March  2022,  which  showed  that  the  market  value  of  the 
Scheme’s assets was £1,432,000 representing 65.2% of the benefits that had accrued to members, after allowing for expected future 
increases in earnings. As required by IAS 19: Employee Benefits, this valuation has been updated by the actuary as at 31 December 
2022. 

The amounts recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position are as follows: 

Total underfunding in funded plans recognised as a liability 

Fair value of plan assets 
Present value of funded obligations 

Movement in the liability for defined benefit obligations 

Opening defined benefit obligations at 1 January  
Benefits paid by the plan 
Interest on obligations 
Actuarial gain 

Liability for defined benefit obligations at 31 December 

2022 
£000 

1,289 
(1,526) 

(237) 

2022 
£000 

2,230 
(75) 
44 
(673) 

1,526 

2021 
£000 

1,543 
(2,230) 

(687) 

2021 
£000 

2,350 
(74) 
32 
(78) 

2,230 

Page | 63  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

28.  Pension liability (continued) 
Funding policy (continued) 

Movement in plan assets 

Opening fair value of plan assets at 1 January 
Expected return on assets 
Contribution by employer 
(Loss) / gain 
Benefits paid 

Closing fair value of plan assets at 31 December 

Expense recognised in income statement 

Interest on obligation 
Expected return on plan assets 

Total included in personnel costs 

Actual (loss) / return on plan assets 

Actuarial gain / (loss) recognised in other comprehensive income  

(Loss) / gain on plan assets 
Actuarial gain on defined benefit obligations 

Plan assets consist of the following 

Equity securities 
Corporate bonds 
Government bonds 
Cash 
Other 

2022 
£000 

1,543 
30 
57 
(266) 
(75) 

1,289 

2022 
£000 

44 
(30) 

14 

(236) 

2022 
£000 

(266) 
673 

407 

2022 
% 

61 
13 
21 
2 
3 

100 

2021 
£000 

1,406 
19 
98 
94 
(74) 

1,543 

2021 
£000 

32 
(19) 

13 

113 

2021 
£000 

94 
78 

172 

2021 
% 

52 
26 
17 
2 
3 

100 

The actuarial assumptions used to calculate Scheme liabilities under IAS19 are as follows: 

Rate of increase in pension in payment:  
Service up to 5 April 1997 
Service from 6 April 1997 to 13 September 2005 
Service from 14 September 2005 
Rate of increase in deferred pensions 
Discount rate applied to scheme liabilities 
Inflation 

2022 
% 

2021 
% 

2019 
% 

- 
3.1 
2.1 
5.0 
5.0 
3.2 

- 
3.4 
2.2 
5.0 
1.7 
3.5 

- 
2.9 
2.1 
5.0 
1.8 
3.0 

The assumptions used by the actuary are best estimates chosen from a range of possible assumptions, which due to the timescale 
covered, may not necessarily be borne out in practice.  

Page | 64  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

29.  Called up share capital  
Ordinary shares of no par value available for issue 

At 31 December 2022 

At 31 December 2021 

Issued and fully paid: Ordinary shares of no par value 

At 31 December 2022 

At 31 December 2021 

A. Analysis of changes in financing during the year 

Balance at 1 January 
Issue of loan notes 
Issue of lease liability 
Issue of shares via scrip dividend 
Payment of lease liabilities 

Balance at 31 December 

       Number 

200,200,000 

200,200,000 

£000 

19,195 

19,133 

2021 
£000 

41,846 
1,450 
 993 
12 
(201) 

44,100 

       Number 

115,072,988 

114,291,639 

2022 
£000 

44,100 
7,659 
520 
62 
(201) 

52,140 

The  2022  closing  balance  is  represented  by  £19,195,000  share  capital  (2021:  £19,133,000),  £31,332,000  of  loan  notes  (2021: 
£23,672,000) and £1,614,000 lease liability (2021: £1,295,000). 

B. Dividends 
On 25 May 2022, MFG declared a dividend of £279,200 (2021: £196,800) which could either be taken up in cash or new ordinary 
shares. 781,349 new shares (2021: 161,562 new shares) were admitted to the Alternative Investment Market (“AIM”) at 8.0205 pence 
per share (2021: 7.0575 pence per share), at a total cost of £62,000 (2021: £12,000). 

C. Convertible loans 
There are three convertible loans totalling £2,950,000 (2021: £2,950,000) (refer to note 27).  

D. Share options and Restricted Stock Units 
i. Issued during the financial year ended 31 December 2022 
On 5 July 2022 and 27 October 2022, MFG granted Restricted Stock Units (“RSUs”) under its 2022 RSU Plan. The Group has issued, 
in total, RSUs over 2,435,000 ordinary shares representing 2.1% of the issued share capital of the Group, including 1,250,000 to 
certain directors and 1,185,000 to certain employees. The RSUs will have a 2-year term and are subject to certain vesting conditions 
based upon an overall growth in profitability. Any RSUs granted will fall away should the recipient leave employment before the 2-
year term expires. Should the individual vesting conditions be satisfied at the end of the term, the stock will be exercised at nil cost.  

The Group directors who received RSUs are as follows: 

  Douglas  Grant,  Group  Chief  Executive  Officer,  who  currently  owns  533,951  ordinary  shares  in  the  Company 
representing a holding of 0.45% was issued 1,075,000 RSUs. Including 700,000 Share Options issued 24 June 2014, 
he would hold a total of 2,308,951 ordinary shares, being 1.98% of the issued share capital of the Company on a fully 
diluted basis; and 
James Smeed, Group Finance Director, was issued 175,000 RSUs. On the same basis, he would hold 0.15% of the 
new issued share capital of the Company. 

 

Page | 65  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

29.  Called up share capital (continued) 
The terms and conditions of the grants are as follows: and will be settled by the physical delivery of shares. 

Grant date / employees entitled 

RSUs granted to key employees at 5 July 2022 
RSUs granted to directors at 5 July 2022 
RSUs granted to key employees at 27 October 2022 
RSUs granted to directors at 27 October 2022 

Total RSUs 

Number of 
Units 

1,020,000 
1,100,000 
165,000 
150,000 

2,435,000 

Contractual 
life of 
options 

2 years 
2 years 
2 years 
2 years 

The fair value of employee services received in return for restricted stock units granted is based on the fair value of them measured 
using the Black-Scholes formula. Service related and non-market performance conditions were not taken into account in measuring 
fair value. The inputs used in measuring the fair values at the grant of the equity-settled restricted stock unit payment plans were as 
follows. 

Fair value of restricted stock units and assumptions 

Share price at grant date 
Exercise price 
Expected volatility * ^ 
Expected life (weighted average) 
Risk-free interest rate (based on government bonds) * ^ 
Forfeiture rate 
Fair value at grant date 

^ Based on past 3 years 
* Annual rates 

Grant at  
5 July 2022 

Grant at  
27 October 2022 

8.5 pence 
nil 
55.14% 
2 years 
1.65% 
0.00% 

8.5 pence 

14.0 pence 
nil 
107.71% 
2 years 
3.15% 
0.00% 
14.0 pence 

The expected volatility is based on both historical average share price volatility and implied volatility derived from traded options over 
the group’s ordnary shares of maturity similar to those of the employee options. 

The fair value of the liability is remeasured at each reporting date and at settlement date. 

The charge for the year for share options granted was £18,000 (2021: £nil). 

ii. Issued during the financial year ended 31 December 2014 
On  23  June  2014,  1,750,000  share  options  were  issued  to  Executive  Directors  and  senior  management  within  the  Group  at  an 
exercise price of 14 pence per share.  

The options vest over three years with a charge based on the fair value of 8 pence per option at the date of grant. The period of grant 
is for 10 years less 1 day ending 22 June 2024, with the condition of three-years continuous employment being met. 

Of the 1,750,000 share options issued, 1,050,000 (31 December 2021:1,050,000) remain outstanding. 

The fair value of services received in return for share options granted is based on the fair value of share options granted, measured 
using a binomial probability model with the following inputs for each award: 

Page | 66  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

29.  Called up share capital (continued) 
ii. Issued during the financial year ended 31 December 2014 (continued) 

Fair value at date of grant 
Share price at date of grant 
Exercise price 
Expected volatility 
Option life 
Risk-free interest rate (based on government bonds) 
Forfeiture rate 

30.  List of associates 
Set out below is a list of associates of the Group:  

Payitmonthly Ltd (“PIML”) 

23 June 
2014 

£0.08 
£0.14 
£0.14 
55.0% 
3 
0.5% 
33.3% 

Group 
2022 
£000 

155 
155 

Group 
2021 
£000 

136 
136 

In  December  2017,  40.0%  of  the  share  capital  of  BLX  was  acquired  for  nil  consideration.  During  2021  financial  year,  the  Group 
obtained control of the subsidiary. Prior to obtaining control, the share of the associate’s total comprehensive income during the year 
was £nil (2021: £22,000). 

In  August  2018,  30%  of  the  share  capital  of  PIML  was  acquired  for  £90,000  consideration.  The  Group’s  resulting  share  of  the 
associate’s total comprehensive income during the year was £18,000 (2021: £10,000). 

31.  List of subsidiaries 
Set out below is a list of direct subsidiaries of the Group:  

Carrying value of investments 

Conister Bank Limited  

Edgewater Associates Limited  
TransSend Holdings Limited  
Manx Ventures Limited  

Nature of 
Business 

31 December 
2022 
% Holding 

Date of 
Incorporation 

Asset and Personal 
Finance 
Wealth Management 
Holding Company 
Holding Company 

100 

100 
100 
100 

05/12/1935 

24/12/1996 
05/11/2007 
15/05/2009 

All subsidiaries are incorporated in the Isle of Man. 

32.  Subsidiaries and non-controlling interests  
A. Acquisition of subsidiary 
Payment Assist Limited (“PAL”) 

2022 
£000 

21,592 

2,005 
- 
- 

23,597 

2021 
£000 

20,592 

2,005 
- 
- 

22,597 

On 16 May 2022, the Group (through MVL) announced that it entered into an agreement to acquire 50.1% of the shares and voting 
interests in  UK focused,  point of sale lender PAL for a total consideration of £4.244 million  payable in  cash. The acquisition was 
completed in September 2022. 

Payment Assist (“PAL”), the UK's leading automotive repair point-of-sale finance provider, works with premier national chains such 
as National Tyres, Halfords and Formula One. PAL has diversified into insured products and retail. 

The agreement with PAL continues MFG’s strategy of acquiring interests in high quality specialist lenders. 

PAL has contributed revenue of £3,407,000 and profit of £701,000 to the Group’s results. If the acquisition had occurred on 1 January 
2022,  management  estimates  that  the  impact  on  consolidated  interest  income  would  have  been  £9,190,000  and  the  impact  on 
consolidated profit for the period would have been £1,473,000. 

In  addition  to  the  acquisition,  MVL  has  agreed  an  option  to  acquire  the  remaining  49.9%  of  Payment  Assist  for  a  variable  cash 
consideration of 2 times the average net profit per share at the point of exercise, subject to a maximum of £5 million (the “Option”). 
The Option can be exercised by MVL at any time for the period until PAL has declared a dividend for the financial year ended 31 
December 2026. 

Page | 67  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

32.  Subsidiaries and non-controlling interests (continued) 
A. Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 
Payment Assist Limited (“PAL”) (continued) 

i. PAL - Consideration transferred 

The following table summarises as at the acquisition date the fair value of each major class of consideration transferred: 

Cash 
Settlement of pre-existing relationship 

ii. PAL - Settlement of pre-existing relationship 

£000 

4,244 
23,490 

27,734 

The Bank and PAL were parties to a Integrated Wholesale Facility loan agreement and a Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan 
with the Bank as lender and PAL as borrower. This pre-existing relationship was £23,102,116 when the Group acquired PAL. 

iii. PAL - Acquisition-related costs 

The Group incurred acquisition-related costs of £101,229 relating to external legal fees and due diligence costs. These costs have 
been included in ‘other costs’ in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

iv. PAL - Identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities assumed 

The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets acquired, and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition: 

Intangible assets – customer related 
Property and equipment 
Trade and other receivables 
Loans and advances to customers 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Creditors and accrued charges 

Total identifiable net assets acquired 

v. PAL – Measurement of fair values 

£000 

273 
269 
10 
25,384 
1,875 
  (4,744) 

23,067 

The valuation techniques used for measuring the fair value of material assets acquired were as follows: 

Assets acquired 

Intangible assets 

vi. PAL - Goodwill 

Valuation technique 

Multi-period excess earnings method: The multi-period excess 
earnings method considers the present value of net cash flows 
expected to be generated by the customer relationships. 

The goodwill arising from the acquisition has been recognised as follows: 

Total consideration transferred 
Non-controlling interest, based on their proportionate interest in the recognised amounts 
Fair value of identifiable net assets 

Goodwill 

£’000 

27,734 
(211) 
(23,067) 

4,456 

Page | 68  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

32.  Subsidiaries and non-controlling interests (continued) 
The Business Lending Exchange (“BLX”)  

On 11 October 2021, the Group (through MVL) announced that it entered into an agreement to acquire 60% of the shares and voting 
interests in BLX. As a result, the Group’s equity interest in BLX increased from 40% to 100%, thereby obtaining control of BLX.  

Regulated by the FCA under Consumer Credit Authorisations, BLX primarily lends to start-up companies and small businesses which 
require asset backed finance. 

The acquisition strengthens the Group’s strategy of developing a network of niche loan brokers within the UK. 

The consideration transferred was £6,524,000 and transaction costs of £25,000 were incurred. The net fair value of identifiable assets 
acquired and liabilities assumed was £5,488,000. Goodwill of £1,098,000 was recognised. 

In 2021 the remeasurement to fair value of the Bank’s existing 20% interest in BLX resulted in a gain of £660,000 (£872,000 less the 
£212,000 carrying amount of the equity accounted investee at the date of acquisition). This amount was included separately in prior 
year’s statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited (“BBSL”) 

On 16 April 2019, the Group (through MVL) acquired 100% of the shares and voting interest in BBSL, obtaining control of BBSL. The 
Group agreed to pay the selling shareholders: 

 
 

50% of net profits in BBSL for 3 years post completion; and 
50% of the incremental net profit that the Group benefits from as a result of taking up BBSL loan proposals post completion 
up until the third anniversary. 

This is to be paid on each anniversary with a final payment in year 4 for the unrealised lending profit. The total consideration is to 
have a cap of £4,000,000 in total. The contingent consideration is calculated by forecasting 3 years of net profits discounted using an 
interest rate of 14.0% per annum. The range of contingent consideration payable is £nil to £2,500,000. 

The remaining contingent consideration payable was remeasured during the period with an interest expense charge of £35,067 and 
remeasurement  loss  of  £109,916.  A  final  payment  of  £781,095  was  paid  during  the  period.  There  is  no  further  consideration  or 
amounts due to the sellers of BBSL. 

B. NCI in subsidiaries 
The  following  table  summarises  the  information  about  the  Group’s  subsidiaries  that  have  material  NCI,  before  any  intra-group 
eliminations. 

31 December 2022 
£’000 

NCI percentage 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Loans and borrowings 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Deferred tax 
Net assets 
Carrying amount of NCI 

Revenue 
Profit 
OCI 
Total comprehensive income 
Profit allocated to NCI 
OCI allocated to NCI 
Operating activities cashflows 
Investing activities cashflows 
Financing activities cashflows 
Net increase / (decrease) in cashflows 

PAL 

49.9% 
2,584 
9,818 
1,116 
15 
251 
(3,089) 
(10,416) 
- 
279 
140 

3,407 
701 
- 
724 
350 
- 
585 
124 
- 
709 

NRF 

10% 
219 
- 
941 
4,507 
27 
(4,355) 
(628) 
(217) 
494 
49 

1,660 
238 
- 
238 
(7) 
- 
87 
(158) 
(12) 
(83) 

Total 

189 

343 
- 

Page | 69  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

33.  Acquisition of financial instrument 
On 9 June 2021 the Group acquired 10% of the issued share capital of RFG for nil consideration. The receipt of the issued share 
capital is considered to be a commitment fee receivable by the Group in order to originate loan facilities in aggregate not exceeding 
£6,250,000 to RFG. The commitment fee is an integral part of the effective interest rate of the associated loan facilities issued to 
RFG.  

The Group is not considered to have a significant influence over RFG as it holds less than a 20% shareholding and is not considered 
to participate in the policy making decisions of the entity. The 10% shareholding has thus been classified as a financial instrument. 

The Group continues to obtain information necessary to measure the fair value of the shares obtained. The fair value of the financial 
instrument received has been determined as £122,000 (2021: £68,000) based on the proportionate share of the net asset value of 
RFG. There has been no change to fair value at year-end. 

As part of the transaction, the Group has been granted two warrants to acquire further shares. The first warrant is for 5% of the share 
capital and the second warrant is for a further 5% of the share capital.  

The two warrants are exercisable dependent upon the Group’s banking subsidiary, the Bank, contracting with RFG, for a larger facility. 
The fair value of the two warrants has been determined to be nil due to the significant uncertainty that exists at acquisition date and 
the period end in issuing a further debt facility. 

34.  Goodwill 

Cash generating unit 

PAL (see Note 32) 
EAL 
BLX 
BBSL 
NRFL 
Manx Collections Limited (“MCL”) 
Three Spires Insurance Services Limited (“Three Spires”) 

Group 
2022 
£000 

4,456 
1,649 
1,908 
1,390 
678 
454 
41 
10,576 

Group 
2021 
£000 

- 
1,849 
1,908 
1,390 
678 
454 
41 
6,320 

As at 31 December 2022, no indications of  impairment have  been assessed on the  PAL goodwill following its recognition on  the 
Group’s Statement of Financial Position (see Note 32). 

The  goodwill  is  considered  to  have  an  indefinite  life  and  is reviewed  on  an  annual  basis by  comparing  its  estimated  recoverable 
amount with its carrying value. The key assumptions used in the estimation of the recoverable amount are set out in this note. The 
recoverable amount of the CGUs discussed in this note were each based on value in use. The values assigned to key assumptions 
represents management’s assessment of future trends in the relevant industries and have been based on historical data from both 
external and internal sources. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the EAL CGU (including also goodwill generated on acquisition of EAL) is based on 
the forecasted 3 year cash flow projections, extrapolated to 10 years using a 2.0% annual increment, and then discounted using a 
14.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of 15.0% and 20.0% on stable profit 
levels. An impairment loss on EAL goodwill of £200,000 has been recognised during the year. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of BLX is based on forecasted 3 year interest 
income  calculated  at  an  average  yield  of  8%,  with  a  terminal  value  calculated  using  a  3.0%  growth  rate  of  net  income  and  then 
discounted using a 14.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of up to 20.0% 
on varying interest income growth rates. 

The estimated  recoverable amount  in  relation  to  the  goodwill  generated  on  the  purchase  of  BBSL  is based  on  forecasted  3 year 
interest income calculated at an average yield of 8%, with a terminal value calculated using a 3.0% growth rate of net income and 
then discounted using a 14.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of up to 
20.0% on varying interest income growth rates. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of NRFL is based on a 4 year sales forecast, 
extrapolated to 14 years using a 1.5% annual increment, and then discounted using a 12% discount factor. The sensitivity of the  
analysis was tested using additional discount factors of up to 20.0% on varying sales volumes. On the basis of the above reviews no 
impairment to goodwill has been made in the current year. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of MCL is based on forecasted 3-year sales 
interest income calculated at 5.0% margin.  

Page | 70  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

34.  Goodwill (continued) 
This is extrapolated to 10 years using a 2.0% annual increment, and then discounted using a 11.0% discount factor. The sensitivity 
of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of 15.0% and 20.0% on varying sales volumes.  

The goodwill generated on the purchase of Three Spires has been reviewed at the current year end and is considered adequate given 
its income streams referred to EAL.  Based on the above no impairment to goodwill has been made in the current year. 

35.  Investment in Group undertakings 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Amounts owed to and from Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and repayable on demand. 

Subordinated loans 
MFG has issued several subordinated loans as part of its equity funding into the Bank and EAL. 

Creation 

Maturity 

Interest rate
% p.a.

Conister Bank Limited 
11 February 2014 
27 May 2014 
9 July 2014 
17 September 2014 
22 July 2013 
25 October 2013 
23 September 2016 
14 June 2017 
12 June 2018 

11 February 2024 
27 May 2024 
9 July 2024 
17 September 2026 
22 July 2033 
22 October 2033 
23 September 2036 
14 June 2037 
12 June 2038 

Edgewater Associates Limited 
21 February 2017 
14 May 2017 

21 February 2027 
14 May 2027 

7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0

7.0
7.0

2022 
£000 

500 
500 
500 
400 
1,000 
1,000 
1,100 
450 
2,000 

150 
128 
7,728 

2021 
£000 

500 
500 
500 
400 
1,000 
1,000 
1,100 
450 
2,000 

150 
128 
7,728 

36.  Related party transactions 
Cash deposits 
During the year, the Bank held cash on deposit on behalf of Jim Mellon (Executive Chairman of MFG). At 31 December total deposits 
amounted to £94,475 (2021: £507,908), at normal commercial interest rates in accordance with the standard rates offered by the 
Bank.  

Key management remuneration including Executive Directors 

Remuneration 
Performance Related Pay 
Pension 

2022 
£000 

516 
68 
41 
625 

2021 
£000 

440 
51 
34 
525 

Employment benefits include gross salaries, performance related pay, employer defined contributions and restricted stock units (Note 
29D). 

As at 31 December 2022, Douglas Grant had £376,163 (2021: £107,386) outstanding to repay in Loans and advances to Conister 
Bank Limited, paying an average interest of 7.0% (2021: 2.54%); and James Smeed, £15,463 (2021: £29,756), paying an average 
interest of 3.01% (2021: 2.65%). No impairment is held in respect of these amounts. 

Intercompany recharges 
Various  intercompany  recharges  are  made  during  the  course  of  the  year  as  a  result  of  the  Bank  settling  debts  in  other  Group 
companies.  

Loan advance to EAL 
On 14 December 2016, a loan advance was made to EAL by the Bank in order to provide the finance required to acquire MBL.  The 
advance was for £700,000 at an interest rate of 8% per annum repayable over 6 years.  A negative pledge was given by EAL to not 
encumber any property or assets or enter into an arrangement to borrow any further monies. The balance as at 31 December 2022 
was £nil (2021: £140,950). 

Page | 71  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

36.  Related party transactions (continued) 

Loan advance to PIML 
On 24 May 2018, a £500,000 loan facility was made available to PIML by the Bank in order to provide the finance required to expand 
its  operations.  The  facility  is  for  12  months.  Interest  is  charged  at  commercial  rates.  At  31  December  2022,  £1,241,000  (2021: 
£1,219,000) had been advanced to PIML. No impairment is held in respect of these amounts. 

Subordinated loans 
The Company has advanced £7,450,000 (2021: £7,450,000) of subordinated loans to the Bank and £278,000 (2021: £278,000) to 
EAL as at 31 December 2022. See note 34 for more details. 

37.  Leases 
A. Leases as lessee 
The Group leases the head office building in the Isle of Man. The lease’s term is 10 years with an option to renew the lease after that 
date. Lease payments are renegotiated every 10 years to reflect market rentals. 

The Group leases an office unit in the United Kingdom and IT equipment with contract terms of 2 to 3 years. These leases are short-
term and / or leases of low-value items. The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for these 
leases. 

Information about leases for which the Group is a lessee is presented below. 

i. Right-of-use assets 

Right-of-use assets related to leased properties that do not meet the definition of investment property are presented as property, plant 
and equipment. 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2022 

Acquisition of subsidiary 
Additions 
As at 31 December 2022 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2022 

Charge for the year 
Eliminated on disposals 
As at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2022 

Carrying value at 31 December 2021 

ii. Amounts recognised in profit or loss 

Interest on lease liabilities 
Depreciation expense 
Expenses relating to short-term leases and low-value assets 

iii. Amounts recognised in statement of cash flows 

Total cash outflow for leases 

Land and 
Buildings 
£000 

1,444 
136 
380 
1,960 

205 
180 
- 
385 

1,575 

1,239 

2022 
£000 

78 
180 
92 

2022 
£000 

280 

Total 
£000 

1,444 
136 
380 
1,960 

205 
180 
- 
385 

1,575 

1,239 

2021 
£000 

42 
162 
64 

2021 
£000 

243 

Page | 72  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

37.  Leases (continued) 

iv. Non-cancellable operating lease rentals are payable in respect of property as follows: 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 
Over five years 
Total operating lease rentals payable 

2022 
£000 

92 
184 
- 
276 

2021 
£000 

64 
128 
- 
192 

38.  Regulators 
Certain Group subsidiaries are regulated by the FSA and the FCA as detailed below. 

The Bank and EAL are regulated by the FSA under a Class 1(1) - Deposit Taking licence and Class 2 - Investment Business licence 
respectively. The Bank and CFL are regulated by the FCA to provide regulated products and services. 

39.  Contingent liabilities 
The Bank is required to be a member of the Isle of Man Government Depositors’ Compensation Scheme which was introduced by 
the Isle of Man Government under the Banking Business (Compensation of Depositors) Regulations 1991 and creates a liability on 
the Bank to participate in the compensation of depositors should it be activated. 

40.  Non-IFRS measures 
Non-IFRS measures included in the financial statements include the following: 

Measure 
Net trading income 
Operating income 

Description 
Net trading income represents net interest income and contributions from non-interest income activities. 
Operating income represents net trading income other operating income and gains or losses on financial 
instruments  

41.  Subsequent events 
There were no subsequent events occurring after 31 December 2022.  

Page | 73  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

42.  Financial risk management 
A. Introduction and overview 
The Group has exposure to the following risks from financial instruments: 

credit risk; 
 
liquidity risk; 
 
  market risk; and 
operational risk. 
 

Risk management framework 
The Board has overall responsibility for the establishment and oversight of the Group’s risk management framework. The Board has 
established the ARCC, which is responsible for approving and monitoring Group risk management policies. The ARCC is assisted in 
its  oversight  role  by  Internal  Audit.  Internal  Audit  undertakes  both  regular  and  ad  hoc  reviews  of  risk  management  controls  and 
procedures, the results of which are reported to the ARCC. 

The Group’s risk management policies are established to identify and analyse the risks faced by the Group, to set appropriate risk 
limits and controls, and to monitor risks and adherence to limits. The risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly 
to reflect changes in market conditions and the Group’s activities. The Group, though its training and management standards and 
procedures, aims to develop a disciplined and constructive control environment in which all employees understand their roles and 
obligations. 

B. Credit risk 
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual 
obligations,  and  arises principally  from the  Group’s  loans  and  advances  to  customers  and  investment  debt  securities. Credit  risk 
includes counterparty, concentration, underwriting and credit mitigation risks.  

Management of credit risk 
The Bank’s Board of Directors created the Credit Committee which is responsible for managing credit risk, including the following: 

 

Formulating  credit  policies in consultation with  business units, covering collateral requirements, credit assessments, risk 
grading and reporting, documentary and legal procedures, and compliance with regulatory and statutory requirements; 
  Establishing the authorisation structure for the approval and renewal of credit facilities. Authorisation limits are allocated in 

line with credit policy; 

  Reviewing and assessing credit risk: The Credit Committee assesses all credit exposures in excess of designated limits, 
before facilities are committed to customers. Renewals and reviews of facilities are subject to the same review process. 
Limiting concentrations of exposures to counterparties, geographies and  industries, by issuer, credit rating band, market 
liquidity and country (for debt securities); 

 

  Developing and maintaining risk gradings to categorise exposures according to the degree of risk of default. The current risk 

grading consists of 3 grades reflecting varying degrees of risk of default; 

  Developing and maintaining the Group’s process for measuring ECL: This includes processes for: 

o 
o 
o 

initial approval, regular validation and back-testing of the models used;  
determining and monitoring significant increase in credit risk; and 
the incorporation of forward-looking information; and 

  Reviewing compliance with agreed exposure limits. Regular reports on the credit quality of portfolios are provided to the 

Credit Committee which may require corrective action to be taken.  

C. Liquidity risk 
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations associated with its financial liabilities that are 
settled by delivering cash or another financial asset. Liquidity risk arises from mismatches in the timing and amounts of cash flows, 
which is inherent to the Group’s operations and investments. 

Management of liquidity risk 
The  Group’s  approach  to  managing  liquidity  is  to  ensure,  as  far  as  possible,  that  it  will  always  have  enough  liquidity  to  meet  its 
liabilities when they are due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to 
the Group’s reputation. The key elements of the Group’s liquidity strategy are as follows: 

 

 

Funding base: offering six-months to five-year fixed term deposit structure with no early redemption option. This means the 
Bank is not subject to optionality risk where customers redeem fixed rate products where there may be a better rate available 
within the market;  
Funding profile: the Bank has a matched funding profile and does not engage in maturity transformation which means that 
on a cumulative mismatch position the Bank is forecast to be able to meet all liabilities as they fall due; 

Page | 74  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

42.  Financial risk management (continued) 
C. Liquidity risk (continued) 
Management of liquidity risk (continued) 

 

  Monitoring maturity mismatches, behavioural characteristics of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities, and the 
extent to which the Group’s assets are encumbered and so not available as potential collateral for obtaining funding;  
Liquidity buffer: the Bank maintains a liquidity buffer of 10.0% of its deposit liabilities, with strict short-term mismatch limits 
of 0.0% for sight to three months and -5.0% for sight to six months. This ensures that the Bank is able to withstand any short-
term liquidity shock; and 
Interbank market: the Bank has no exposure to the interbank lending market. The Bank has no reliance on liquidity via the 
wholesale markets. In turn, if market conditions meant access to the wholesale funding was constrained as per the 2008 
credit crisis, this would have no foreseeable effect on the Bank.  

 

The Bank’s liquidity position is monitored daily against internal and external limits agreed with the FSA and according to the Bank’s 
Liquidity Policy. The Bank also has a Liquidity Contingency Policy and Liquidity Contingency Committee in the event of a liquidity 
crisis or potential liquidity disruption event occurring. 

The Treasury department receives information from other business units regarding the liquidity profile of their financial assets and 
financial liabilities and details of other projected cash flows arising from projected future business. Treasury then maintains a portfolio 
of short-term liquid assets, largely made up of short-term liquid investment securities, loans and advances to banks and other inter-
bank facilities, to ensure that sufficient liquidity is maintained within the Group as a whole. 

Regular liquidity stress testing is conducted under a variety of scenarios covering both normal and more severe market conditions. 
The scenarios are developed considering both Group-specific events and market-related events (e.g. prolonged market illiquidity). 

D. Market risk 
Market risk is the risk that of changes in market prices; e.g. interest rates, equity prices, foreign exchange rates and credit spreads 
(not relating to changes in the obligor’s / issuer’s credit standing), will affect the Group’s income or value of its holdings of financial 
instruments. The objective of the Group’s market risk management is to manage and control market risk exposures within acceptable 
parameters to ensure the Group’s solvency while optimising the return on risk. 

Management of market risks 
Overall authority for market risk is vested in the Assets and Liabilities Committee (“ALCO”) which sets up limits for each type of risk. 
Group finance is responsible for the development of risk management policies (subject to review and approval by the ALCO) and for 
the day-to-day review of their implementation. 

Foreign exchange risk 
The Bank is not subject to foreign exchange risks and its business is conducted in pounds sterling. 

Equity risk 
The Group has investment in associates which are carried at cost adjusted for the Group’s share of net asset value. The Bank has 
access to these accounts. The Bank’s exposure to  market risk is not considered significant given  the  low carrying amount of the 
investment. 

The Group’s does not hold any investments in listed equities.  

Interest rate risk 
The principal potential interest rate risk that the Bank is exposed to is the risk that the fixed interest rate and term profile of its deposit 
base differs materially from the fixed interest rate and term profile of its asset base, or basis and term structure risk.  

Additional interest rate risk may arise for banks where (a) customers are able to react to market sensitivity and redeem fixed rate 
products and (b) where a bank has taken out interest rate derivate hedges especially against longer-term interest rate risk, where the 
hedge moves against the bank. However, neither of these risks apply to the Bank. 

Interest rate risk for the Bank is not deemed to be currently material due to the Bank’s matched funding profile. Any interest rate risk 
assumed by the Bank will arise from a reduction in interest rates, in a rising environment due to the nature of the Bank’s products and 
its matched funded profile. The Bank should be able to increase its lending rate to match any corresponding rise in its cost of funds, 
notwithstanding  its  inability  to vary  rates  on  its  existing  loan  book.  The  Bank  attempts  to efficiently  match  its  deposit  taking  to  its 
funding requirements. 

Page | 75  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

42.  Financial risk management (continued) 
E. Operational risk 
Operational  risk  is  the  risk  of direct  or  indirect  loss  arising  from a  wide  variety  of  causes associated  with  the  Group’s processes, 
personnel, technology and infrastructure, and from external factors other than credit, market and liquidity risks – e.g. those arising 
from legal and regulatory requirements and generally accepted standards of corporate behaviour. Operational risks arise from all of 
the Group’s operations. 

Management of operational risk 
The Group’s objective is to manage operational risk so as to balance the avoidance of financial losses and damage to the Group’s 
reputation with overall cost effectiveness and innovation. In all cases, Group policy requires compliance with all applicable legal and 
regulatory requirements. 

The Group has developed standards for the management of operational risk in the following areas: 

  Business continuity planning; 
  Requirements for appropriate segregation of duties, including the independent authorisation of transactions; 
  Requirements for the reconciliation and monitoring of transactions; 
  Compliance with regulatory and other legal requirements; 
  Documentation of controls and procedures; 
  Periodic assessment of operational risks faced, and the adequacy of controls and procedures to address the risks identified; 
  Requirements for the reporting of operational losses and proposed remedial action; 
  Development of contingency plans; 
 
  Ethical and business standards; 
 
  Risk mitigation, including insurance where this is cost-effective. 

Information technology and cyber risks; and  

Training and professional development; 

Compliance  with  Group standards  is  supported  by  a  programme  of  periodic  reviews  undertaken  by  Internal  Audit.  The  results  of 
Internal Audit reviews are reported to the ARCC. 

43.  Basis of measurement 
The financial statements are prepared on a historical cost basis, except for the following material items: 

Items 

Measurement basis 

FVTPL – Trading asset 
FVOCI – Debt securities 
Land and buildings 
Deferred consideration 
Net defined benefit liability 

Fair value 
Fair value 
Fair value 
Fair value 
Fair  value  of  plan  assets  less  the  present  value  of  the 
defined benefit obligation 

Page | 76  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies 
The Group has adopted the following new standards and amendments to standards, including any consequential amendments to 
other standards, with a date of initial application of 1 January 2022: 

  Amendment to IFRS 1 First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards—Subsidiary as a First-time Adopter 

(issued on 12 April 2022); 

  Amendment to IFRS 9 Financial Instruments—Fees in the ‘10 per cent’ Test for Derecognition of Financial Liabilities (issued 

on 12 April 2022); 

  Amendment to IAS 41 Agriculture — Taxation in Fair Value Measurements (issued on 12 April 2022); 
  Amendments to IAS 37: Onerous Contracts — Cost of Fulfilling a Contract (issued on 12 April 2022);  
  Amendments to IAS 16: Property and Equipment: Proceeds before Intended Use (issued on 12 April 2022); and 
  Amendments to References to the Conceptual Framework in IFRS Standards (issued on 12 April 2022). 

No significant changes followed the implementation of these standards and amendments. 

New standards and amendments to standards, adopted but not yet effective with an initial application of 1 January 2023: 

  Adoption of IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts (issued on 17 May 2022); 
  Adoption of Disclosure of Accounting Policies (Amendments to IAS 1 and IFRS Practice Statement 2) (issued on 2 December 

2022); 

  Adoption of Definition of Accounting Estimates (Amendments to IAS 8) (issued on 2 December 2022); and 
  Adoption of Deferred Tax related to Assets and Liabilities arising from a Single Transaction (Amendments to IAS 12) (issued 

on 2 December 2022) 

No significant changes are anticipated followed the implementation of the standards and amendments effective on 1 January 2023. 

The Group has consistently applied the following accounting policies to all periods presented in these financial statements.  

Set out below is an index of the significant accounting policies, the details of which are available on the pages that follow: 

Ref. 

Note description 

A. 
B.  
C. 
D.  
E. 
F. 
G. 
H. 
I. 
J. 
K. 
L. 
M. 
N. 
O. 
P. 
Q. 

Basis of consolidation of subsidiaries and separate financial statements of the Company 
Interest in equity accounted investees 
Interest 
Fee and commission income 
Leases 
Income tax 
Financial assets and financial liabilities 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangibles assets and goodwill 
Impairment of non-financial assets 
Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities 
Employee benefits 
Share capital and reserves 
Earnings per share (“EPS”) 
Segmental reporting 

No. 

78 
78 
78 
79 
79 
80 
81 
85 
85 
85 
85 
86 
87 
87 
87 
87 
88 

Page | 77  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

A. Basis of consolidation of subsidiaries and separate financial statements of the Company 
i. Business combinations 
The  Group  accounts  for  business  combinations  using  the  acquisition  method  when  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group.  The 
consideration transferred does not include amounts related to the settlement of pre-existing relationships. Such amounts are generally 
recognised in profit or loss. 

Any contingent consideration is measured at fair value at the date of acquisition. If an obligation to pay contingent consideration that 
meets the definition of a financial instruments is classified as equity, then it is not measured, and settlement is accounted for within 
equity. Otherwise, other contingent consideration is remeasured at fair value at each reporting date and subsequent changes in the 
fair value of the contingent consideration are recognised in profit or loss. 

ii. Subsidiaries 
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity if it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from 
its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its control over the entity. The Group reassesses 
whether it has control if there are changes to one or more of the elements of control. This includes circumstances in which protective 
rights held (e.g. those resulting from a lending relationship) become substantive and lead to the Group having power over an investee. 
The  financial  statements  of  subsidiaries  are  included  in  the  consolidated  financial  statements  from  the  date  on  which  control 
commences until the date on which control ceases. 

iii. Non-controlling interests (“NCI”) 
NCI are measured initially at their proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets at the date of acquisition. 

Changes in the Group’s interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity transactions. 

iv. Loss of control 
When the Group loses control over a subsidiary, it derecognises the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, and any related NCI and 
other components of equity. Any resulting gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss. Any interest retained in the former subsidiary is 
measured at fair value when control is lost.  

v. Transactions eliminated on consolidation 
Intra-group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated 
in preparing the consolidated financial statements. Unrealised losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealised gains, but only to 
the extent that there is no evidence of impairment. 

vi. Separate financial statements of the Company 
In the separate financial statements of the Company, interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures are accounted for at cost. 

B. Interests in equity accounted investees 
The Group’s interests in equity accounted investees may comprise interests in associates and joint ventures. 

Associates  are  those  entities  in  which  the  Group  has  significant  influence,  but  not  control  or  joint  control,  over  the  financial  and 
operating policies. A joint venture is an arrangement in which the Group has joint control, whereby the Group has rights to the net 
assets of the arrangement, rather than rights to its assets and obligations for its liabilities.  

Interests  in  associates and  joint  ventures  are  accounted  for  using  the  equity method. They  are  initially  recognised  at cost,  which 
includes transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, the consolidated financial statements include the Group’s share of the 
profit or loss and OCI of equity accounted investees, until the date on which significant influence or joint control ceases. 

C. Interest  
Interest income and expense are recognised in profit or loss using the effective interest rate method.  

i. Effective interest rate 
The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts of the financial instrument to 
the gross carrying amount of the financial asset or amortised cost of the financial liability. When calculating the effective interest rate 
for financial assets, the Group estimates future cash flows considering all contractual terms of the financial instruments, including 
origination fees, loan incentives, broker fees payable, estimated early repayment charges, balloon payments and all other premiums 
and discounts. It also includes direct incremental transaction costs related to the acquisition or issue of the financial instrument. The 
calculation does not consider future credit losses. 

Page | 78  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

C. Interest (continued) 
ii. Amortised cost and gross carrying amount 
The amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability is the amount at which the financial asset or financial liability is measured 
on initial recognition minus the principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative amortisation using the effective interest method of 
any difference between that initial amount and the maturity amount and, for financial assets, adjusted for any expected credit loss 
allowance.  

The gross carrying amount of a financial asset is the amortised cost of a financial asset before adjusting for any expected credit loss 
allowance. 

iii. Calculation of interest income and expense 
In calculating interest income and expense, the effective interest rate is applied to the gross carrying amount of the asset (when the 
asset is not credit-impaired) or to the amortised cost of the liability. 

However, for financial  assets that have become credit-impaired  subsequent to  initial recognition,  interest income  is calculated  by 
applying  the  effective  interest  rate  to  the  amortised  cost  of  the  financial  asset.  If  the  asset  is  no  longer  credit-impaired,  then  the 
calculation of interest income reverts to the gross basis. 

D. Fee and commission income 
The Group generates fee and commission income through provision of independent financial advice, insurance brokerage agency, 
introducer of foreign exchange services and commissions from brokering business finance for small and medium sized enterprises.  

Independent financial advice and insurance brokerage agency 
Income represents commission arising on services and premiums relating to policies and other investment products committed during 
the year, as well as renewal commissions having arisen on services and premiums relating to policies and other investment products 
committed during the year and previous years and effective at the balance sheet date. Income is recognised on the date that policies 
are submitted to product providers with an appropriate discount being applied for policies not completed. As a way to estimate what 
is  due  at  the  year-end,  a  “not  proceeded  with”  rate  of  10.0%  for  pipeline  life  insurance  products  and  0.0%  for  non-life insurance 
pipeline is assumed. Renewal commissions are estimated by taking the historical amount written pro-rata to 3 months.  

Other 
Income other than that directly related to the loans is recognised over the period for which service has been provided or on completion 
of an act to which the fee relates.  

E. Leases 
At inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if the 
contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration. 

i. As a lessee 
At commencement or on modification of a contract that contains a lease component, the Group allocates the consideration in the 
contract to each lease component on the basis of its relative stand-alone prices. However, for the leases of property the Group has 
elected not to separate non-lease components and as a result, accounts for the lease and non-lease components as a single lease 
component. 

The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability at the lease commencement date. The right-of-use asset is initially 
measured at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease payments made at or before the 
commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to dismantle and remove the underlying asset or 
to restore the underlying asset or the site on which it is located, less any lease incentives received. 

The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method from the commencement date to the end of the 
lease term, unless the lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset to the Group by the end of the lease term or the cost of the 
right-of-use asset reflects that the Group will exercise a purchase option. In that case the right-of-use asset will be depreciated over 
the useful life of the underlying asset, which is determined on the same basis as those of property and equipment. In addition, the 
right-of-use asset is periodically reduced by impairment losses, if any, and adjusted for certain remeasurements of the lease liability. 

The  lease  liability  is  initially  measured  at  the  present  value of  the  lease  payments  that  are  not  paid  at  the  commencement  date, 
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing 
rate. Generally, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate. 

The Group determines its incremental borrowing rate by obtaining interest rates from various external financing sources and makes 
certain adjustments to reflect the terms of the lease and the type of the asset leased. 

Page | 79  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

E. Leases (continued) 
i. As a lessee (continued) 
Lease payments included in the measurement of the lease liability comprise the following: 

Fixed payments, including in-substance fixed payments; 

 
  Variable  lease  payments  that  depend  on  an  index  or  a  rate,  initially  measured  using  the  index  or  rate  as  at  the 

commencement date; 

  Amounts expected to be payable under a residual value guarantee; and 
 

The exercise price under a purchase option that the Group is reasonably certain to exercise, lease payments in an optional 
renewal period if the Group is reasonably certain to exercise an extension option, and penalties for early termination of a 
lease unless the Group is reasonably certain not to terminate early. 

The lease liability is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. It is remeasured when there is a change in future 
lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate, if there is a change in the Group’s estimate of the amount expected to be 
payable under a residual value guarantee, if the Group changes its assessment of whether it will exercise a purchase, extension or 
termination option or if there is a revised in-substance fixed lease payment. 

When the lease liability is remeasured in this way, a corresponding adjustment is made to the carrying amount of the right-of-use 
asset, or is recorded in profit or loss if the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset has been reduced to zero. 

The Group presents right-of-use assets that do not meet the definition of investment property in ‘property, plant and equipment’ and 
lease liabilities in ‘loans and borrowings’ in the statement of financial position. 

Short-term leases and leases of low-value assets 
The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for leases of low-value assets and short-term leases, 
including IT equipment. The Group recognises the lease payments associated with these leases as an expense on a straight-line 
basis over the lease term.  

ii. As a lessor 
At inception or on modification of a contract that contains a lease component, the Group allocates the consideration in the contract to 
each lease component on the basis of their relative stand-alone prices. 

When the Group acts as a lessor, it determines at lease inception whether each lease is a finance or an operating lease. 

To  classify  each  lease,  the  Group  makes  an  overall  assessment  of  whether  the  lease  transfers  substantially  all  of  the  risks  and 
rewards  incidental  to  ownership  of  the  underlying  asset.  If  this  is  the case,  then  the  lease  is  a  finance  lease;  if  not,  then  it  is  an 
operating lease. As part of this assessment, the Group considers certain indicators such as whether the lease is for the major part of 
the economic life of the asset. 

Finance leases and HP contracts  
When assets are subject to a finance lease or HP contract, the present value of the lease payments is recognised as a receivable. 
The difference between the gross receivable and the present value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance income. HP 
and lease income is recognised over the term of the contract or lease reflecting a constant periodic rate of return on the net investment 
in the contract  or lease. Initial direct costs, which  may include  commissions and  legal fees directly attributable to negotiating and 
arranging the contract or lease, are included in the measurement of the net investment of the contract or lease at inception.  

Operating leases  
Leases in which a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership are retained  by the  lessor are classified as operating 
leases. Payments made under operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) are charged to profit or loss and other 
comprehensive income on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. 

F. Income tax 
Current and deferred taxation 
Current taxation relates to the estimated corporation tax payable in the current financial year. Deferred taxation is provided in full, 
using the liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts 
in  the  consolidated  financial  statements.  Deferred  tax  is  not  recognised  for  taxable  temporary  differences  arising  on  the  initial 
recognition of goodwill and temporary differences related to investments in subsidiaries and associates to the extent that the Group 
is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable 
future. 

Deferred taxation is determined using tax rates, and laws that have been enacted or substantially enacted by the reporting date and 
are expected to apply when the related deferred tax is realised. Deferred taxation assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can be utilised.  

Page | 80  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities 
i. Recognition and initial measurement 
The Group initially recognises loans and advances, deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities on the date on which 
they are originated. All other financial instruments including regular-way purchases and sales of financial assets are recognised on 
the trade date, which is the date on which the Group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

A financial asset or financial liability is measured initially at fair value plus, for an item not at FVTPL, transaction costs that are directly 
attributable to its acquisition or issue. 

ii. Classification 
Financial assets 
On initial recognition, a financial asset is classified as measured at amortised cost, FVOCI or FVTPL. 

A financial asset is measured at amortised cost if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as at FVTPL: 

 
 

The asset is held within a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows; and 
The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are solely payments of principal 
and interest (“SPPI”). 

A debt instrument is measured at FVOCI only if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as FVTPL: 

 

 

The asset is held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling 
financial assets; and 
The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are SPPI. 

On  initial  recognition  of  an  equity  investment  that  is  not  held  for  trading,  the  Group  may  irrevocably  elect  to  present  subsequent 
changes in fair value in OCI. This election is made on an investment-by-investment basis. 

All other financial assets are classified as measured at FVTPL. 

In addition, on initial recognition, the Group may irrevocably designate a financial asset that otherwise meets the requirements to be 
measured at amortised cost or at FVOCI as at FVTPL if doing so eliminates or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch that 
would otherwise arise. 

Business model assessment 
The Group makes an assessment of the objective of a business model in which an asset is held at a portfolio level because this best 
reflects the way the business is managed and information provided to management. 

Assessment of whether contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest 
For the purposes of this assessment, ‘principal’ is defined as the fair value of the financial asset on initial recognition. ‘Interest’ is 
defined as consideration for the time value of money and for the credit risk associated with the principal amount outstanding during a 
particular period of time and for other basic lending risks and costs (e.g. liquidity risk and administrative costs), as well as profit margin. 
In assessing whether the contractual cash flows are SPPI, the Group considers the contractual terms of the instrument. This includes 
assessing whether the financial asset contains a contractual term that could change the timing or amount of contractual cash flows 
such that it would not meet this condition. 

Reclassifications 
Financial assets are not reclassified subsequent to their initial recognition, except in the period after the Group changes its business 
model for managing financial assets. 

Financial liabilities  
The Group classifies its financial liabilities, other than financial guarantees and loan commitments, as measured at amortised cost. 

iii. Derecognition 
Financial assets 
The Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire, or when it 
transfers the rights to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership 
of the financial asset are transferred or in which the Group neither transfers nor retains substantially all of the risks and rewards of 
ownership and it does not retain control of the financial asset. 

Page | 81  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
iii. Derecognition (continued) 
Financial assets (continued) 
On derecognition of a financial asset, the difference between the carrying amount of the asset (or the carrying amount allocated to 
the portion of the asset derecognised) and the sum of (i) the consideration received (including any new asset obtained less any new 
liability assumed) and (ii) any cumulative gain or loss that had been recognised in OCI is recognised in profit or loss. 

Financial liabilities 
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its contractual obligations are discharged or cancelled, or expire. 

iv. Modifications of financial assets and financial liabilities 
Financial assets  
If the terms of a financial asset are modified, then the Group evaluates whether the cash flows of the modified asset are substantially 
different.  

If the cash flows are substantially different, the contractual rights to cash flows from the original financial asset are deemed to have 
expired. In this case, the original financial asset is derecognised and a new financial asset is recognised at fair value plus any eligible 
transaction costs. 

If the cash flows are modified when the borrower is in financial difficulties, then the objective of the modification is usually to maximise 
recovery of the original contractual terms rather than to originate a new asset with substantially different terms. If the Group plans to 
modify a financial asset in a way that would result in forgiveness of cash flows, then it first considers whether a portion of the asset 
should be written off before the modification takes place. This approach impacts the result of the quantitative evaluation and means 
that the derecognition criteria are not usually met in such cases. 

If the modification of a financial asset measured at amortised cost or FVOCI does not result in derecognition of the financial asset, 
then the Group first recalculates the gross carrying amount of the financial asset using the original effective interest rate of the asset 
and recognises the resulting adjustment as a modification gain or loss in profit or loss. Any costs or fees incurred and fees received 
as part of the modification adjust the gross carrying amount of the modified financial asset and are amortised over the remaining term 
of the modified financial asset. If such modification is carried out because of financial difficulties of the borrower, then the gain or loss 
is presented together with impairment losses. In other cases, it is presented as interest income calculated using the effective interest 
rate method. 

Financial liabilities 
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its terms are modified and the cash flows of the modified liability are substantially 
different. In this case, a new financial liability based on the modified terms is recognised at fair value. The difference between the 
carrying  amount  of  the  financial  liability  derecognised  and  consideration  paid  is  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.  Consideration  paid 
includes non-financial assets transferred, if any, and the assumption of liabilities, including the new modified financial liability. 

If the modification of a financial liability is not accounted for as derecognition, then the amortised cost of the liability is recalculated by 
discounting the modified cash flows at the original effective interest rate and the resulting gain or losses recognised in profit or loss. 
Any costs and fee incurred are recognised as an adjustment of the carrying amount of the liability and amortised over the remaining 
term of the modified financial liability by re-computing the effective interest rate on the instrument. 

v. Offsetting 
Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only 
when, the Group currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the amounts and it intends either to settle them on a net basis or 
to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

Income and expenses are presented on a net basis only when permitted under IFRS, or for gains and losses arising from a group of 
similar transactions such as in the Group’s trading activity. 

vi. Fair value measurement 
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market 
participants at the measurement date in the principal or, in its absence, the most advantageous market to which the Group has access 
at the date. The fair value of a liability reflects its non-performance risk. 

The  Group  recognises  transfers  between  levels  of  the  fair value  hierarchy as of  the  end of  the  reporting period  during  which  the 
change has occurred. 

Page | 82  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vi. Fair value measurement (continued) 
The Group measures fair values using the following fair value hierarchy, which reflects the significance of the inputs used in making 
the measurements:  
  Level 1: inputs that are quoted market prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical instruments; 
  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. 
derived  from  prices).  This  category  includes  instruments  valued  using:  quoted  market  prices  in  active  markets  for  similar 
instruments; quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are considered less than active; or other valuation 
techniques in which all significant inputs are directly or indirectly observable from market data; and 

  Level 3: inputs that are unobservable. This category includes all instruments for which the valuation technique includes inputs not 
based  on  observable  data  and  the  unobservable  inputs  have  a  significant  effect  on  the  instrument’s  valuation.  This  category 
includes instruments that are valued based on quoted prices for similar instruments for which significant unobservable adjustments 
or assumptions are required to reflect differences between the instruments. 

The fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities that are traded in active markets are based on quoted market prices or dealer 
price quotations. For all other financial instruments, the Group determines fair values using other valuation techniques. 

For financial instruments that trade infrequently and have little price transparency, fair value is less objective, and requires varying 
degrees  of  judgement  depending  on  liquidity,  concentration,  uncertainty  of  market  factors,  pricing  assumptions  and  other  risks 
affecting the specific instrument.  

vii. Impairment 
A financial instrument that is not credit-impaired on initial recognition is classified in ‘Stage 1’ and has its credit risk continuously monitored by 
the Group.   

If a SICR since initial recognition is identified, the financial instrument is moved to ‘Stage 2’ but is not yet deemed to be credit impaired.  

  An SICR is always deemed to occur when the borrower is 30 days past due on its contractual payments.  If the Group becomes 
aware ahead of this time of non-compliance or financial difficulties of the borrower, such as loss of employment, avoiding contact 
with the Group then an SICR has also deemed to occur; and  

  A  receivable  is  always  deemed  to  be  in default and credit-impaired  when the  borrower  is  90 days  past  due  on  its  contractual 
payments or earlier if the Group becomes aware of severe financial difficulties such as bankruptcy, individual voluntary arrangement, 
abscond or disappearance, fraudulent activity and other similar events.  

If the financial instrument is credit-impaired, the financial instrument is then moved to ‘Stage 3’. Financial instruments in Stage 3 have 
their ECL measured based on expected credit losses on an undiscounted lifetime basis. 

The Group measures loss allowances at an amount equal to lifetime ECL, except for debt investment securities that are determined 
to have low credit risk at the reporting date for which they are measured as a 12-month ECL. Loss allowances for lease receivables 
are always measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL. 

12-month ECL are the portion of ECL that result from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within the 12 months 
after  the  reporting  date.  Financial  instruments  for  which  a  12-month  ECL  is  recognised  are  referred  to  as  ‘Stage  1  financial 
instruments’. 

Lifetime  ECL  are  the  ECL  that  result  from  all  possible  default  events  over  the  expected  life  of  a  financial  instrument.  Financial 
instruments for which a lifetime ECL is recognised but which are not credit-impaired are referred to as ‘Stage 2 financial instruments’. 

Page | 83  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vii. Impairment (continued) 

Measurement of ECL 
After a detailed review, the Group devised and implemented an impairment methodology in light of the IFRS 9 requirements outlined 
above noting the following: 

 

 

 

 

The  ECL  was  derived  by  reviewing  the  Group’s  loss  rate  and  loss  given  default  over  the  past  9  years  by  product  and 
geographical segment; 
The Group has assumed that the future economic conditions will broadly mirror the current environment and therefore the 
forecasted loss levels in the next 3 years will match the Group’s experience in recent years; 
For  portfolios  where  the  Group  has  never  had  a  default  in  its  history  or  has  robust  credit  enhancements  such  as  credit 
insurance or default indemnities for the entire portfolio, then no IFRS 9 provision is made.  At 2022 year-end, 28.8% had 
such credit enhancements (2021: 36.6%); and 
If the Group holds objective evidence through specifically assessing a credit-impaired receivable and believes it will go on 
to  completely recover the debt due to the collateral held and  cooperation with  the borrower, then  no  IFRS 9 provision is 
made. 

ECL are probability-weighted estimates of credit losses. They are measured as follows: 

 

 

Financial assets that are not credit-impaired at the reporting date: as the present value of all cash shortfalls (i.e. the difference 
between the cash flows due to the entity in accordance with the contract and the cash flows that the Group expects to receive); 
Financial assets that are credit-impaired at the reporting date: as the difference between the gross carrying amount and the present 
value of estimated future cash flows; and 

  Undrawn loan commitments: as the present value of the difference between the contractual cash flows that are due to the Group if 

the commitment is drawn down and the cash flows that the Group expects to receive. 

Credit-impaired financial assets 
At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost and debt financial assets carried at 
FVOCI, and finance lease receivables are credit-impaired (referred to as ‘Stage 3 financial assets’). A financial asset is credit-impaired 
when one or more events that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset have occurred. 

Evidence that a financial asset is credit-impaired includes the following observable date: 

  Significant financial difficulty of the borrower or issuer; 
  A breach of contract such as a default or past due event; 
 
 
 

The restructuring of a loan or advance by the Group on terms that the Group would not consider otherwise; 
It is becoming probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy or another type of financial reorganisation; or 
The disappearance of an active market for a security because of financial difficulties. 

A loan that has been renegotiated due to a deterioration in the borrower’s condition is usually considered to be credit-impaired unless 
there is evidence that the risk of not receiving contractual cash flows has reduced significantly and there are no other indicators of 
impairment. In  addition,  a  retail  loan  that  is overdue  for  90 days  or more  is considered  credit-impaired  even  when  the  regulatory 
definition of default is different. 

In assessing of whether an investment in sovereign debt is credit impaired, the Group considers the following factors: 

 
 
 
 

 

The market’s assessment of creditworthiness as reflected in the bond yields; 
The rating agencies’ assessments of creditworthiness; 
The country’s ability to access the capital markets for new debt issuance; 
The  probability  of  debt  being  restructured,  resulting  in  holders  suffering  losses  through  voluntary  or  mandatory  debt 
forgiveness; and 
The international support mechanisms in place to provide the necessary support as ‘lender of last resort’ to that country, as 
well as the intention, reflected in public statements, of governments and agencies to use those mechanisms. This includes 
an assessment of the depth of those mechanisms and, irrespective of the political intent, whether there is the capacity to 
fulfil the required criteria. 

Presentation of allowance for ECL in the statement of financial position 
Loss allowances for ECL are presented in the statement of financial position as follows: 

Financial assets measured at amortised cost: as a deduction from the gross carrying amount of the assets; 
Loan commitments: generally, as a provision; and 

 
 
  Debt instruments measured at FVOCI: no loss allowance is recognised in the statement of financial position because the 
carrying amount of these assets is their fair value. However, the loss allowance is disclosed and is recognised in the fair 
value reserve. 

Page | 84  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vii. Impairment (continued) 

Write-off 
Loans and debt securities are written off (either partially or in full) when there is no reasonable expectation of recovering a financial 
asset in its entirety or a portion thereof. This is generally the case when the Group determines that the borrower does not have assets 
or sources of income that could generate sufficient cash flows to repay the amounts subject to the write-off. This assessment is carried 
out at the individual asset level. 

Recoveries of amounts previously written off are included in ‘impairment losses on financial instruments’ in the statement of profit or 
loss and OCI. 

Financial assets that are written off could still be subject to enforcement activities in order to comply with the Group’s procedures for 
recovery of amounts due. 

H. Cash and cash equivalents 
For  the  purpose  of  the  statement  of cash  flows,  cash  and cash  equivalents  comprise  cash  and  deposit  balances  with  an  original 
maturity date of three months or less.  

I. Loans and advances 
Loans and advances’ captions in the statement of financial position include: 

 

 

Loans and advances measured at amortised cost (see note 44 (G)). They are initially measured at fair value plus incremental 
direct transaction costs, and subsequently at their amortised cost using the effective interest method; and 
Finance lease receivables (see note 44 (E)). 

J. Property, plant and equipment  
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less accumulated depreciation (see below). Historical cost includes 
expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of the items. Buildings are carried at a revalued amount, being fair value at 
the date of revaluation less subsequent depreciation and impairment and are revalued annually. 

If an asset’s carrying amount is increased as a result of a revaluation, the increase shall be recognised in other comprehensive income 
and accumulated in equity under the heading of revaluation surplus. However, the increase shall be recognised in profit or loss to the 
extent that it reverses a revaluation decrease of the same asset previously recognised in profit or loss. 

If an asset’s carrying amount is decreased as a result of a revaluation, the decrease shall be recognised in profit or loss. However, 
the decrease shall be recognised in other comprehensive income to the extent of any credit balance existing in the revaluation surplus 
in respect of that asset. The decrease recognised in other comprehensive income reduces the amount accumulated in equity under 
the heading of revaluation surplus. 

The assets’ residual values and useful economic lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each reporting date. An asset’s 
carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated 
recoverable amount.  

When parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, those components are accounted for as separate 
items of property, plant and equipment.  

Depreciation and amortisation 
Assets are depreciated or amortised on a straight-line basis, so as to write off the book value over their estimated useful lives.  The 
estimated useful lives of property, plant and equipment and intangibles are as follows: 

Property, plant and equipment 
Leasehold improvements 
IT equipment 
Motor vehicles 
Furniture and equipment 
Plant and machinery 

to expiration of the lease 
4 - 5 years 
2 - 5 years 
4 -10 years 
5 – 20 years 

K. Intangible assets and goodwill 
i. Goodwill  
Goodwill that arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries is measured at cost less accumulated impairment losses. 

Page | 85  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

K. Intangible assets and goodwill (continued) 
ii. Software 
Software acquired by the Group is measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses.  

Expenditure on internally developed software is recognised as an asset when the Group is able to demonstrate: that the product is 
technically feasible, its intention and ability to complete the development and use the software in a manner that will generate future 
economic  benefits,  and  that  it  can  reliably  measure  the  costs  to  complete  the  development.  The  capitalised  costs  of  internally 
developed  software  include  all  costs  directly  attributable  to  developing  the  software  and  capitalised  borrowing  costs,  and  are 
amortised  over  its  useful  life.  Internally  developed  software  is  stated  at  capitalised  cost  less  accumulated  amortisation  and  any 
accumulated impairment losses. 

Software is amortised on a straight-line basis in profit or loss over its estimated useful life, from the date on which it is available for 
use.  Amortisation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted if appropriate. 

iii. Other 
Intangible assets that are acquired by an entity and having finite useful lives are measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and 
any accumulated impairment losses.  

Intangible  assets  acquired  as part  of  a business combination,  with  an  indefinite  useful  live  are  measured  at  fair  value. Intangible 
assets with indefinite useful lives are not amortised but instead are subject to impairment testing at least annually.  

The useful lives of intangibles are as follows:  

Customer contracts and lists 
Business intellectual property rights 
Website development costs 
Software 

to expiration of the agreement 
4 years - indefinite 
indefinite 
5 years 

L. Impairment of non-financial assets 
At  each  reporting  date,  the  Group  reviews  the  carrying  amounts  of  its  non-financial  assets  (other  than  deferred  tax  assets)  to 
determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. 
Goodwill is tested annually for impairment. 

For impairment testing, assets are grouped together into the smallest group of assets that generates cash inflows from continuing 
use  that  is  largely  independent  of  the  cash  inflows  of  other  assets  or  Cash  Generating  Units  (“CGUs”).  Goodwill  arising  from  a 
business combination is allocated to CGUs or groups of CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. 

The recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is the greater of its value in use and its fair value less cost to sell. Value in use is based 
on  the  estimated  future  cash  flows,  discounted  to  their  present  value  using  a  pre-tax  discount  rate  that  reflects  current  market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset or CGU. 

An impairment loss is recognised if the carrying amount of an asset or CGU exceeds its recoverable amount. 

The Group’s corporate assets do not generate separate cash inflows and are used by more than one CGU. Corporate assets are 
allocated to CGUs on a reasonable and consistent basis and tested for impairment as part of the testing of the CGUs to which the 
corporate assets are located. 

Impairment losses are recognised in profit or loss. They are allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to 
the CGU, and then to reduce the carrying amounts of the other assets in the CGU on a pro rata basis. 

An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed. For other assets, an impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the 
asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or amortisation, 
if no impairment loss had been recognised. 

Page | 86  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

M. Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities 
Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities are the Group’s sources of debt funding. 

The  Group  classifies  capital  instruments  as  financial  liabilities  or  equity  instruments  in  accordance  with  the  substance  of  the 
contractual terms of the instruments.  

Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities are initially measured at fair value minus incremental direct transaction 
costs, and subsequently measured at their amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

N. Employee benefits 
i. Long-term employee benefits 
Pension obligations 
The Group has pension obligations arising from both defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans.  

A defined contribution pension plan is one under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate fund and has no legal or 
constructive  obligations  to  pay  further  contributions.  Defined  benefit  pension  plans  define  an  amount  of  pension  benefit  that  an 
employee will receive on retirement, usually dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and remuneration.  

Under the defined benefit pension plan, in accordance with IAS 19 Employee benefits, the full-service cost for the period, adjusted 
for any changes to the plan, is charged to the income statement. A charge equal to the expected increase in the present value of the 
plan liabilities, as a result of the plan liabilities being one year closer to settlement, and a credit reflecting the long-term expected 
return on assets based on the market value of the scheme assets at the beginning of the period, is included in the income statement. 

The statement of financial position records as an asset or liability as appropriate, the difference between the market value of the plan 
assets and the present value of the accrued plan liabilities. The difference between the expected return on assets and that achieved 
in the period, is recognised in the income statement in the year in which they arise. The defined benefit pension plan obligation is 
calculated by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method and a discount rate based on the yield on high quality 
rated corporate bonds.   

The Group’s defined contribution pension obligations arise from contributions paid to a Group personal pension plan, an ex gratia 
pension plan, employee personal pension plans and employee co-operative insurance plans. For these pension plans, the amounts 
charged to the income statement represent the contributions payable during the year.  

ii. Share-based compensation 
The Group maintains a share option programme which allows certain Group employees to acquire shares of the Group. The change 
in the fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding change in equity. The fair value of 
the options is measured at grant date and spread over the period during which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the 
options.  

At each reporting date, the Group revises its estimate of the number of options that are expected to vest and recognises the impact 
of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.  

The  fair  value  is estimated  using  a  proprietary  binomial  probability  model.  The  proceeds received,  net  of  any  directly  attributable 
transaction costs, are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are exercised.  

O. Share capital and reserves 
Share issue costs 
Incremental costs that are directly attributable to the issue of an equity instrument are deducted from the initial measurement of the 
equity instruments. 

P. Earnings per share (“EPS”) 
The Group presents basic and diluted EPS data for its Ordinary Shares. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss that is 
attributable to ordinary Shareholders of MFG by the  weighted-average  number of Ordinary Shares outstanding during the period. 
Diluted EPS is determined by adjusting profit or loss that is attributable to Ordinary Shareholders and the weighted-average number 
of  Ordinary  Shares  outstanding  for  the  effects  of  all  dilutive  potential  Ordinary  Shares,  which  comprise  share  options  granted  to 
employees. 

Page | 87  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2022 

44.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

Q. Segmental reporting 
A segment is a distinguishable component of the Group that is engaged either in providing products or services (business segment), 
or in providing products or services within a particular economic environment (geographical segment), which is subject to risks and 
rewards that are different from those of other segments. The Group’s primary format for segmental reporting is based on business 
segments.  

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur 
expenses,  including revenues and expenses relating to transactions with  any of the  Group’s other components, whose operating 
results are regularly reviewed by the CEO who is the chief operating decision maker (“CODM”) to make decisions about resources to 
be allocated to the segment and assess its performance, and for which discrete financial information is available. 

Segment results reported to the CEO include items that are directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated 
on a reasonable basis. 

Page | 88  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

SHAREHOLDER NOTES 

Page | 89  

 
 
 
Appendix – Glossary of terms  

ALCO 
ARCC 
BBSL 
BL 
BLX 
Bank 
Bank’s Board 
BOE 
BSL 
CEO 
CET1 
CFL 
CGU 
CODM 
Company 
EAL 
ECF 
ECL 
ESG 
EPS 
FCA 
Fraud risks 
FSA 
FVOCI 
FVTPL 
Group 
HP 
IAS 
ICAAP 
ICG 
IFA 
IFRIC 
IFRS 
Interim financial statements 
IOM 
ISA 
JM 
LSE 
MBL 
MCL 
MFG 
MFX 
MFX.L 
MVL 
NEC 
NOMCO 
NRFL 
OCI 
PAL 
PIML 
QCA 
REMCO 
RFG 
RMF 
SBA 
Scheme 
SICR 
SPPI 
SR 
Subsidiaries 
TCF 
Three Spires 
UK 
UP  

Assets and Liabilities Committee 
Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee 
Blue Star Business Solutions Limited 
Burnbrae Limited 
The Business Lending Exchange Limited 
Conister Bank Limited 
The Bank’s Board of Directors 
Bank of England 
Beer Swaps Limited 
Chief Executive Officer 
Common Equity Tier 1 
Conister Finance & Leasing Ltd 
Cash Generating Unit 
Chief Operating Decision Maker 
Manx Financial Group PLC 
Edgewater Associates Limited 
ECF Asset finance PLC 
Expected Credit Loss 
Environmental, Social and Governance 
Earnings Per Share 
UK Financial Conduct Authority 
Risk of Material Misstatement Due to Fraud 
Isle of Man Financial Services Authority 
Fair Value Through Other Comprehensive Income 
Fair Value Through Profit or Loss 
Comprise the Company and its subsidiaries 
Hire Purchase 
International Accounting Standard 
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process 
Individual Capital Guidance 
Independent Financial Advisors 
International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
Condensed consolidated interim financial statements 
Isle of Man 
International Standards of Auditing 
Jim Mellon 
London Stock Exchange 
MBL Financial Limited 
Manx Collections Limited 
Manx Financial Group PLC 
Manx FX Limited 
Manx Financial Group PLC ticker symbol on the LSE 
Manx Ventures Limited (previously Bradburn Limited) 
Notice of Error Correction 
Nomination Committee 
Ninkasi Rentals & Finance Limited (previously Beer Swaps Limited) 
Other Comprehensive Income 
Payment Assist Limited 
Payitmonthly Limited 
Quoted Companies Alliance 
Remuneration Committee 
Rivers Finance Group Plc 
Risk Management Framework 
Share Buyback Agreement 
The Conister Trust Pension and Life Assurance Scheme 
Significant Increase in Credit Risk 
Solely Payments of Principal and Interest 
Southern Rock Insurance Company Limited 
MFG’s subsidiaries being Bank, BBSL, BLX, CFL, ECF, EAL, MFX, MVL, NRFL 
Treating Customers Fairly 
Three Spires Insurance Services Limited 
United Kingdom 
Unrelated parties 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Clarendon House 
Victoria Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man 
IM1 2LN 

Tel: 
(01624) 694694 
Fax:  (01624) 624278 

www.mfg.im